Harris Platinum

Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers
Frames and Modules
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Edition I
PT-FR MAN
Platinum
Wideband Digital Multirate Routing
Switchers Frames and Modules
Installation, Configuration, and

Operation Manual
Edition I
June 2008
Copyright Information
Copyright 2008 Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard, Melbourne,
Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all
previous releases. Printed in Canada.
This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and are
distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of
Harris Corporation and its licensors, if any.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated into new editions of the publication. Harris Corporation may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described
in this publication at any time.
Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your warranty
coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures for obtaining
warranty service. To view the complete warranty, visit our website.
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.
Contents
Preface
Manual Information ....................................................................................... xi
Applications ................................................................................................xiii
Unpacking/Shipping Information................................................................. xiv
Unpacking a Product ............................................................................ xiv
Returning a Product ............................................................................. xiv
Standards ...................................................................................................... xv
EMC Compliance Standards ................................................................ xvi
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance ................xvi
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) Compliance ...........................................................................xvii
Safety .........................................................................................................xviii
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview ......................................................................................................... 1
Product Description ........................................................................................ 2
Main Features ................................................................................................. 3
Frame Architecture ......................................................................................... 4
Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement......................................................... 11
Frame-Specific Components ................................................................. 11
Module-Specific Components ............................................................... 12
Front Panel LED Indicators .......................................................................... 18
Control Features ........................................................................................... 20
Physical ................................................................................................. 20
Parametric ............................................................................................. 20
Signal .................................................................................................... 20
CCS Control System Integration Requirements ................................... 21
Applications Integration ........................................................................ 22
Frame Specifications .................................................................................... 25
Chapter 2: Frame Modules

Overview ....................................................................................................... 27
PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect ................. 28
Operation ............................................................................................... 28
Installation ............................................................................................. 28
Configuration ........................................................................................ 28
PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module ......................... 29
Operation ............................................................................................... 29
Installation ............................................................................................. 32
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual iii
Contents
Configuration ........................................................................................ 32
PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module ........................................................... 33
Operation ............................................................................................... 33
Installation ............................................................................................. 34
Configuration ........................................................................................ 34
PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames ........................................ 35
Operation ............................................................................................... 35
PM-ALARM-5 Pinouts ......................................................................... 38
Installation ............................................................................................. 38
Configuration ........................................................................................ 38
Controllable Parameters ........................................................................ 39
PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames ............... 41
Operation ............................................................................................... 41
Pinout Diagram ..................................................................................... 43
Installation ............................................................................................. 43
Configuration ........................................................................................ 43
PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module/
PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module ........................................................ 46
Operation ............................................................................................... 46
Installation ............................................................................................. 47
Configuration ........................................................................................ 47
Specifications ........................................................................................ 47
PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module ............................................. 49
Operation ............................................................................................... 49
Installation ............................................................................................. 50
Configuration ........................................................................................ 50
PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame .................................................... 51
Operation ............................................................................................... 51
Installation ............................................................................................. 51
Configuration ........................................................................................ 52
PM-FAN-5: Fan Module for 5RU Frames ................................................... 53
Operation ............................................................................................... 53
Installation ............................................................................................. 54
Configuration ........................................................................................ 54
PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: Fan Modules for
9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames .................................................................... 55
Operation ............................................................................................... 55
Installation ............................................................................................. 56
Configuration ........................................................................................ 56
PT-SYNC: Sync Module .............................................................................. 57
Operation ............................................................................................... 57
Installation ............................................................................................. 59
Configuration ........................................................................................ 59
Functional Block Diagram .................................................................... 61
Specifications ........................................................................................ 62
PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module ..................................... 63
Operation ............................................................................................... 63
Installation ............................................................................................. 63
Configuration ........................................................................................ 63
iv Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Contents
Chapter 3: Input Modules

Overview ....................................................................................................... 65
Input Module General Description ............................................................... 66
Control Requirements ........................................................................... 67
Applications Integration ........................................................................ 67
Controllable Parameters List ................................................................. 68
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ............................. 69
Operation ............................................................................................... 69
Installation ............................................................................................. 69
Configuration ........................................................................................ 70
Specifications ........................................................................................ 72
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules ......................... 73
Operation ............................................................................................... 73
Installation ............................................................................................. 74
Configuration ........................................................................................ 74
Specifications ........................................................................................ 77
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ................................... 78
Operation ............................................................................................... 78
Installation ............................................................................................. 78
Configuration ........................................................................................ 79
Specifications ........................................................................................ 81
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules .............................. 82
Operation ............................................................................................... 82
Installation ............................................................................................. 82
Configuration ........................................................................................ 83
Specifications ........................................................................................ 86
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules
PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules ............................. 87
Operation ............................................................................................... 87
Installation ............................................................................................. 88
Configuration ........................................................................................ 89
Pinout Diagram ..................................................................................... 91
Specifications ........................................................................................ 92
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input
Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input
Modules with TDM Capability .................................................................... 94
Operation ............................................................................................... 94
Installation ............................................................................................. 96
Configuration ........................................................................................ 96
Pinout Diagram ..................................................................................... 99
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual v

Contents
Specifications ...................................................................................... 101

PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules 103
Operation ............................................................................................. 103
Installation ........................................................................................... 105
Configuration ...................................................................................... 105
Controllable Parameters ...................................................................... 106
Functional Block Diagram .................................................................. 108
Specifications ...................................................................................... 109
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules .............................. 110
Operation ............................................................................................. 110
Installation ........................................................................................... 113
Configuration ...................................................................................... 113
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 117
Specifications ...................................................................................... 118
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input
Modules with TDM Capability .................................................................. 120
Operation ............................................................................................. 120
Installation ........................................................................................... 123
Configuration ...................................................................................... 124
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 128
Specifications ...................................................................................... 130
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Receiver ................ 132
Operation ............................................................................................. 132
Installation ........................................................................................... 133
Configuration ...................................................................................... 133
Specifications ...................................................................................... 136
Chapter 4: Output Modules

Overview ..................................................................................................... 137
Output Module General Description ........................................................... 138
Controllable Parameters Lists ............................................................. 140
Signal Flow Diagram .......................................................................... 141
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SD with Reclocking Output Modules .... 142
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB: HD-SD with Reclocking and Dual Output
Modules....................................................................................................... 142
Operation ............................................................................................. 142
Installation ........................................................................................... 144
Configuration ...................................................................................... 144
Specifications ...................................................................................... 147
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SD with Reclocking Output Modules 148
Operation ............................................................................................. 148
Installation ........................................................................................... 149
Configuration ...................................................................................... 150
vi Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Contents
Specifications ...................................................................................... 153

PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD with Reclocking Output Modules ................ 154
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking
and Dual Output Modules ........................................................................... 154
Operation ............................................................................................. 154
Installation ........................................................................................... 155
Configuration ...................................................................................... 156
Specifications ...................................................................................... 158
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD with Reclocking Output Modules ............ 159
Operation ............................................................................................. 159
Installation ........................................................................................... 160
Configuration ...................................................................................... 160
Specifications ...................................................................................... 163
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules ................... 164
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules....................... 164
Operation ............................................................................................. 164
Installation ........................................................................................... 166
Configuration ...................................................................................... 166
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 169
Specifications ...................................................................................... 170
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced
Output Modules with TDM Capability ...................................................... 172
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial
Output Modules with TDM Capability ....................................................... 172
Operation ............................................................................................. 172
Installation ........................................................................................... 174
Configuration ...................................................................................... 174
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 178
Specifications ...................................................................................... 180
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules ........ 181
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog
Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output................................................. 181
Operation ............................................................................................. 181
Installation ........................................................................................... 183
Configuration ...................................................................................... 183
Specifications ...................................................................................... 187
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio
Converter Output Modules ......................................................................... 188
Operation ............................................................................................. 188
Installation ........................................................................................... 189
Configuration ...................................................................................... 190
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 192
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual vii
Contents
Specifications ...................................................................................... 193

PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output
Modules with TDM Capability .................................................................. 195
Operation ............................................................................................. 195
Installation ........................................................................................... 196
Configuration ...................................................................................... 197
Pinout Diagram ................................................................................... 200
Specifications ...................................................................................... 202
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Transmitter ....... 204
Operation ............................................................................................. 204
Installation ........................................................................................... 205
Configuration ...................................................................................... 205
Specifications ...................................................................................... 208
Chapter 5: Crosspoint Modules

Overview ..................................................................................................... 209
Crosspoint Module General Description .................................................... 210
Controllable Parameters Lists ............................................................. 211
PM-40×32-3G5: 40×32 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules ................................. 214
Operation ............................................................................................. 214
Installation ........................................................................................... 214
Configuration ...................................................................................... 214
Specifications ...................................................................................... 215
PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64×64 Crosspoint Modules .................... 216
Operation ............................................................................................. 216
Installation ........................................................................................... 217
Configuration ...................................................................................... 217
Specifications ...................................................................................... 217
PM-72×64-3G5: 72×64 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules ................................. 218
Operation ............................................................................................. 218
Installation ........................................................................................... 218
Configuration ...................................................................................... 218
Specifications ...................................................................................... 219
PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9: 128×128 Crosspoint Module ......... 220
Operation ............................................................................................. 220
Installation ........................................................................................... 221
Configuration ...................................................................................... 221
Specifications ...................................................................................... 221
PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28:
128×256 Crosspoint Module ...................................................................... 222
viii Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Contents
Operation ............................................................................................. 222

Installation ........................................................................................... 223
Configuration ...................................................................................... 223
Specifications ...................................................................................... 223
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules
224
Operation ............................................................................................. 224
Installation ........................................................................................... 227
Configuration ...................................................................................... 227
Specifications ...................................................................................... 228
Chapter 6: Output Monitoring Modules

Overview ..................................................................................................... 229
Output Monitoring Module General Description ....................................... 230
Controllable Parameters List ............................................................... 234
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module ................................... 235
Operation ............................................................................................. 235
Installation ........................................................................................... 236
Configuration ...................................................................................... 236
Specifications ...................................................................................... 238
Chapter 7: Installation
Before You Begin ....................................................................................... 240
Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and
Crosspoint Module Firmware ..................................................................... 241
Installing Input and Output Modules ......................................................... 246
Installing Crosspoint Modules ................................................................... 248
Module Placement ............................................................................... 248
Installing Modules ............................................................................... 249
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures
for Fiber Optical Modules .......................................................................... 250
Installing Modules ............................................................................... 250
Removing Modules ............................................................................. 252
Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections ............................. 253
Installing Output Monitoring Modules ...................................................... 256
Installing Sync Modules.............................................................................. 256
Installing Alarm Modules ........................................................................... 257
Installing Back Panel Modules ................................................................... 258
Installing Resource Modules ...................................................................... 259
Installing Power Supplies ........................................................................... 260
Replacing Fans ........................................................................................... 262
Configuration ...................................................................................... 262
Installing a Platinum Frame ....................................................................... 263
Common Issues and Things to Check ................................................. 263
Commonly Performed Procedures ...................................................... 263
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual ix

Contents
Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components ......................... 264
Chapter 8: Configuration
Card-Edge Controls .................................................................................... 268
Using the Card-Edge Controls ............................................................ 268
Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters ............................................... 268
Card-Edge Screen Saver ..................................................................... 269
Controllable Parameters List Appearance ........................................... 269
Navigating the Parameters List ........................................................... 270
Frame Controllable Parameters .................................................................. 271
Default Settings ................................................................................... 271
Application Parameters ....................................................................... 271
Fail-Safe Parameters ........................................................................... 273
Configuration via RouterMapper ............................................................... 276
Adding Platinum Frames by Polling ................................................... 276
Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering ........................................... 276
Adding Platinum Frames using the Add Command ........................... 277
Frame Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper .... 277
Chapter 9: Terminal Operation

Overview ..................................................................................................... 281
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session ................................................ 281
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session for
Serial Control Interface Products ............................................................... 282
Establishing a Telnet Session for Ethernet Control
Interface Products ....................................................................................... 283
Protocol Support for Platinum Routers ...................................................... 284
Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and

Compliances
Overview ............................................................................................................ 287
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual ................................................. 288
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product ................................................ 289
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge ............................................................ 290
Injury Precautions ...................................................................................... 291
Product Damage Precautions ..................................................................... 293
EMC and Safety Standards ........................................................................ 295
Additional EMC Information .............................................................. 296
Appendix B: Laser Safety Guidelines

General Laser Information .......................................................................... 299
Lasers and Eye Damage .............................................................................. 300
Classification of Lasers ............................................................................... 300
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Communication Systems ....... 301
Laser Safety ......................................................................................... 301
Precautions for Enclosed Systems ...................................................... 301
Precautions for Unenclosed Systems .................................................. 302
Labels .......................................................................................................... 303
Specifications .............................................................................................. 303
Index
Keywords ................................................................................................... 305
x Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
This manual provides information on the features and applications for the
Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for
installation, setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the product, and is useful to
operations personnel for purposes of daily operation and reference.
Revision History
Table P-1. Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
A March 2006 Initial production release
B October 2006 • Added PT-A2-DTB connector information
• Added PT-AEC-BOC connector information
• Added pinout diagrams for PT-ADC-IB and
PT-DAC-OB modules
C December 2006 • Added 9RU support
• Added new crosspoint sizes
• Added pinout information for RS-232 and
RS-422 serial ports
D October 2007 • Updated PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB and
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB specifications
• Added TDM support
• Added PT-SYNC information
E December 2007 • Added PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB
information
• Updated PT-EXPS information
• Added 3 Gb/s input/output module
information
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xi

Preface
Table P-1. Revision History of Manual (Continued)

Edition Date Comments
F January 2008 • Updated specification information for
PM-HSIB+ and PT-HSIB+ modules
• Updated specification information for
PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules
G February 2008 • Updated RouterMapper-configurable
parameters list
• Added fiber-optical module information
H March 2008 • Updated PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB
linearity deviation
• Updated crosspoint installation procedures
I June 2008 • Added 5RU support
• Added DC power supply information
• Updated fiber optical modules information
• Added firmware upgrade procedures for
3 Gb input, output, and crosspoint modules
Writing Conventions
To enhance your understanding, the authors of this manual have adhered to the
following text conventions:
Table P-2. Writing Conventions

Term or
Description
Convention
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check
boxes, list boxes, combo boxes, menus, submenus, windows,
lists, and selection names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books or publications,
and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that
need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB,
CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry
or something you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus
and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic
document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
Note troubleshoot problems
xii Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface
Obtaining Documents
Technical documents can be viewed or downloaded from our website.
Alternatively, contact your Customer Service representative to request a
document.
Applications
• SDTV/HDTV/AES core routing
The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher can be used as an
on-air router for up to 512x512 applications; for example, core facility
routing, master control distribution, transmission solutions, etc.
• SD to HD migration
The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher will pass and
reclock both standard SD (including 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540 Mb/s) and
HD (1.485 Gb/s) signals, which allows you to route both SD and HD
signals in the same router. Consequently, it provides you with a high degree
of investment protection, in that an SD facility could easily migrate to HD
without the need to replace the router.
• AES/EBU digital audio, SD, and HD in the same platform
The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher can switch signals
from 3 Mb/s to 1.5Gb/s, thereby providing a truly digital signal diagnostic
solution. The Platinum I/O boards will route digital audio, SD and HD.
Now you can route nearly any digital audio or video signal within the same
router platform.
• Analog audio conversion
• Analog video conversion
• ASI / SSI routing applications
• Digital signal monitoring
• Distributed routing
• Central casting
Link two or more Platinum routers together between facilities, and control
and operate as if using one large routing system from your central facility.
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xiii
Preface
Unpacking/Shipping Information
Unpacking a Product
All products have been carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before
shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service.
1. Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during
transit.
2. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.
3. Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing.
4. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.
5. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unit.
Returning a Product
In the unlikely event that a product fails to operate properly, please contact our
Customer Service Department to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number,
then send the unit back for servicing.
Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to
be returned for service. If the original package is not available, you can supply
your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria:
• The packaging must be able to withstand the product’s weight.
• The product must be held rigid within the packaging.
• There must be at least 2 in. (5 cm) of space between the product and the
container.
• The corners of the product must be protected.
If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return it to you by
prepaid ground shipment after servicing.
xiv Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface
Standards
There are three sets of standards used in the development of the Platinum
product line: product standards, compliance standards, and safety standards.
Product Standards
The following product standards apply to the Platinum router. Please reference
the pertinent standard for more information.
Professional Video
SMPTE 259M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE Standard for Television - Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High
Definition Television Systems
SMPTE 344M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 540 Mb/s Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcasting Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and
Similar Professional Equipment
SMPTE-170M
For Analog Video Signal quality
FCC 73.699
U.S. Federal guidelines for NTSC analog composite video
ITU-R.BT 470
Guidelines for PAL analog composite video
ITU-R BT601-4
For Serial Digital Video
Digital Audio
AES3-2003
AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering -Serial
Transmission Format for Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio
Data
AES3id-2001
AES Information Document for Digital Audio Engineering -Transmission of
AES3 Formatted Data by Unbalanced Coaxial Cable
SMPTE 276M-1995
SMPTE Standard for Television - Transmission of AES-EBU Digital Audio
Signals Over Coaxial Cable
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xv

Preface
PT-PS Power Supply

Safety
TUV approved to latest revision of UL 60950-1 and CSA 22.2 complete with
CB Report with all country deviations1
CE Mark
EMC Compliance tested under EN 55103-1, 2 as a Class A Device in an E4
environment
NEBS
Level 3 Certification, Type 4 Environment, SBC Special Requirements, AT&T
NEDS
EMC Compliance Standards

The following EMC compliance standards apply:
• EN 50081-1
• EN 55022
• EN 50082-1
• IEC 1000-4-2 1995-01
• IEC 801-3 1984
• IEC 1000-4-4 1995-01
• Part 15 of the FCC Rules
• ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

Directive 2002/95/EC—commonly known as the European Union (EU)
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)—sets limits on the use of certain
substances found in electrical and electronic equipment. The intent of this
legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of
landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life
recycling. The Directive, which took effect on July 1, 2006, refers to the
following hazardous substances:
• Lead (Pb)
• Mercury (Hg)
• Cadmium (Cd)
• Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)
• Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)
• Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)
1
A total of 8 PT-PS power supplies can be used in the Platinum chassis. TUV will test
for chassis leakage currents using all 8 power supplies operating simultaneously to de-
termine the total chassis leakage current. This total chassis leakage current value must
meet EN60950 and CSA 22.2.
xvi Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface
In accordance with this EU Directive, all products sold in the European Union
will be fully RoHS-compliant and “lead-free.” (See our website for more
information on dates and deadlines for compliance.) Spare parts supplied for the
repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the
legislation. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with
a RoHS-compliant emblem, as shown in Figure P-1.
Figure P-1. RoHS Compliance Emblem
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery,
and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the
WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated
hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. Effective
August 13, 2005, producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and
electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and may not dispose of the
equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU
member states may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic
devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be
properly recycled. (See our website for more information on dates and deadlines
for compliance.) Contact your local sales representative for information on
returning these products for recycling. Equipment that complies with the EU
directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem, as shown in Figure
P-2.
Figure P-2. WEEE Compliance Emblem
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xvii
Preface
Safety Standards
The following safety standards apply (full descriptions of these standards can be
found in Appendix A):
• IEC-950
• UL 60950-1
• EN60950: 1992 + A1: 1993 + A2: 1993 +A3: 1995 A4: 1997 +A11:
1997 EMKO-TSE (74-SEC) 207/94
• UL1419
• CSA C22.2 No. 1
Safety
Carefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. You will find a complete list of
safety precautions in Appendix A. Any user-serviceable components (such as
fuses or batteries) are only replaceable by those components listed in the
manual.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

WARNING
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may
result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is
present.
CAUTION
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can
result in damage to the equipment or other property.
xviii Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
Overview
The Platinum routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and
functionality of our routing switcher product line. Its flexible modular
architecture accommodates both standard definition and high definition digital
video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This
combination allows high performance, multi-format video routing within a
single, flexible frame.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• “Control Features” on page 20
• “Frame-Specific Components” on page 11
• “Frame Specifications” on page 25
• “Front Panel LED Indicators” on page 18
• “Main Features” on page 3
• “Module-Specific Components” on page 12
• “Product Description” on page 2
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 1

Product Description
The Platinum routing switcher system provides matrix expandability beyond
8×8, to 512×512 in a single frame. The 8×8 building block provides ideal
growth and flexibility for mixed applications such as high definition and serial
digital interface, and other integrated processing opportunities such as analog
and/or digital conversion. With its ability to route signals ranging from 3.0 Mb/s
to 2.97 Gb/s, the Platinum router offers a clear growth path from lower bit rate
signals to high bandwidth, high definition format signals. This router will also
handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI/SSI signal formats.
The Platinum router is available in these frame sizes:
• The 5RU (PM-FR-5) frame supports matrices up to 72×64.
• The 9RU (PM-FR-9) frame supports matrices up to 128×128.
• The 15RU (PT-FR-15) frame supports matrices up to 256×256.
• The 28RU (PT-FR-28) frame supports matrices up to 512×512.
All of these frames use common, front-loadable, and hot-swappable input and
output modules. The 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames use common crosspoint
modules. (The 5RU frame uses a different crosspoint module). Each frame has a
passive module interconnect (MI) signal distribution module interconnecting
the routing system.
The frames support user-friendly, self guiding insertion and extraction: No
module can be inserted into the wrong area where damage (electrical or
physical) may occur. The frames are designed so that, during module insertion
or extraction, damage to other modules is prevented. All modules ground before
any active components are energized. This includes standard make-before-break
power connectors and grounding tabs, where necessary, on modules.
Each frame is accessible from the front via sectioned, removable doors. Status
LEDs can be viewed through these doors; these LEDs indicate power supply
presence (and status), resource module usage, and link light indicators for
Ethernet communications ports. Two tri-color LEDs that indicate user-defined
alarm conditions are also viewable through the door. (See Figure 1-8 on
page 19.)
The frames are designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements
(e.g., non-removable door option, locking power supplies, etc.).
Platinum frames are compatible with all of Harris’s router control software
products, such as CCS Navigator™ and RouterMapper™.
A key advantage of the Platinum router is that it provides redundant crosspoint
paths in the 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames. This function, a common concern of
professional broadcast customers, is not offered by many current competitive
products. By using redundant crosspoint modules, a fully redundant path
through the system is available. While the 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU Platinum
frames provide complete hardware crosspoint redundancy, all frames offer
redundant path operation based on advanced rule sets integrated into the control
system, thus providing a more robust operation than typically found in
competitive offerings.
2 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Main Features
• Routing for large systems
• 72×64 in a 5RU frame
• Video routing
• HD-SDI digital multirate from 3.00 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s
• Digital video signals including SMPTE 310, SDI, ASI, HD-SDI
• Analog video via conversion to/from SDI on I/O modules
• Audio routing
• Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced (coaxial) AES
• Analog stereo audio via conversion to/from AES on I/O modules
• Module I/O in groups of 8
• Route to/from digital and analog signals with no external processing
• Front-loading, hot swappable modules
• Redundancy (power supplies, resource modules, signal paths) throughout
• Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities
• Secure access rights with restrictions by level, source, and destination
• CCSP, SNMP, and third-party protocol support

Frame Architecture
Platinum routing switchers are available in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frame
sizes. Each size can accommodate any signal format or combination of signal
formats, and has different options available for customizing. (Some aspects of
frame customization and matrix size specifics will be discussed in detail in each
signal format’s individual section).For illustrations of each frame size’s physical
architecture, see Figure 1-1 on page 5 through Figure 1-4 on page 7.
Table 1-1. Platinum Series Architectural Information

5RU 9RU 15RU 28RU
Architecture
(PM-FR-5) (PM-FR-9) (PT-FR-15) (PT-FR-28)
Dimensions
Width 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
Depth 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm)
Height 8.75 in. (22.2 cm) 15.75 in.(40.0 cm) 26.25 in.(66.7 cm) 49.00 in.(124.5 cm)
Weight fully loaded (approx.) 68 lb (31 kg) 125 lb (57 kg) 210 lb (95 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
Matrix size 72×64 128×128 256×256 512×512
Matrix module capacity

Input slots 9 16 32 64
Output slots 8 16 32 64
Crosspoint slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 4 (2 redundant) 8
Resource slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
TDM slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
Sync slots 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
PSU slots 2 4 4 8
Monitoring slots 2 4 4 4
Alarm slots 1 1 1 1
Streaming slots 1 1 1 1
Standard equipment
Power supply 1 1 2 4
Fan module 1 1 1 2
Upgrade options
Redundant power supply Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant resource module Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant sync options Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant crosspoint Yes Yes Yes Yes

Figure 1-1. 72×64 Physical Architecture
Power supplies
Crosspoint module
MI module (128×128)
2 1
Outputs 1-128 Inputs 1-128
Output modules Input modules

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

Power supplies
Crosspoint module
MI module
(128×256)
2 1
Outputs 1-128 Inputs 1-128
Outputs 129-256
4 3 Inputs 129-256

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

Power supplies
Crosspoint module
(128×256)
Outputs 1-128 2 1
Inputs 1-128
MI module
Outputs 129-256 4 3 Inputs 129-256
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2),

Sync (2), OM (4)
Outputs 257-384 6 5 Inputs 257-384

Reclocker Driver
EQ
Outputs 385-512 8 7 Inputs 385-512
Power supplies

The Platinum router's modular architecture consists of separate input and output
modules, each of which contains eight inputs or outputs; and crosspoint
matrixes (redundant crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation).
Depending on the configuration, one or more modules may be present in the
frame for various optional functions. See Table 1-1 on page 4 for frame
population information.
• Detailed information about input modules (such as configuration,
installation, block diagrams, and specifications) is outlined in Chapter 3.
• Detailed information about output modules is outlined in Chapter 4.
• Detailed information about crosspoint modules is outlined in Chapter 5.
• Detailed information about output monitoring submodules is outlined in
Chapter 6.
A resource module (PT-RES) is required for system control. A second resource
module may be added for redundancy. See page 33 for detailed information
about the resource module.
A single power supply supplies the core components for each frame size.
Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional
power supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy.
Table 1-1 on page 4 shows the number of total power supplies required for each
frame size. See page 46 for detailed information about the power supply
module.
The Platinum router supports several output monitoring modules, which are
available as options. See page 16 for brief descriptions of these options.
Detailed information about these options (such as configuration, installation,
block diagrams, and specifications) is outlined in Chapter 6.
Status LEDs, viewable through the door, indicate power supply presence and
status, resource card usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet
communications ports. Two bicolor LEDs, also viewable through the door,
indicate user-defined alarm conditions. Since the door is removable, frame
cooling is fully functional whether or not the door is present. (For maximum
cooling, we recommend leaving the door closed.)
Frame modular components include the following items. These items are
illustrated in Figure 1-5 on page 9, Figure 1-6 on page 9, and Figure 1-7 on
page 10.
• Input modules are located on the right side of the frame, and output modules
are located on the left side, as viewed from the front when the front panel
door is opened. Both module types are visible from the front when the front
panel door is opened. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
• The resource module and optional redundant resource module are located in
the middle of the frame in 28RU frames, and below the output modules in
5RU, 9RU and 15RU frames. Resource modules are visible when the front
panel door is opened. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
• The sync module and optional redundant sync module are located below the
resource modules in 5RU frames and above the resource modules in 9RU,
15RU, and 28RU frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.) Sync modules
are visible when the front panel door is opened.
Figure 1-5. Platinum 5RU Frame Modular Components
Figure 1-6. Platinum Frame Modular Components (15RU Shown)

• Power supply modules are located at the bottom of the frame in 5RU
frames, at the top of the frame in 9RU and 15RU frames, and at the top and
the bottom of the frame in 28RU frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
• Back panel I/O modules mount to the rear of the frame (behind the input
and output modules) and provide input and output connections for the
system. (See Figure 1-7.) The same BNC back panel I/O module is used for
the inputs as well as the outputs.
• Fans are located on the rear of the frame and are individually removable in
case of a failure. (See Figure 1-7.)
• The communications back panel is located bottom of the frame, below the
back panel connectors for the output modules. (See Figure 1-7.)
Figure 1-7. Platinum 15RU Frame Showing Back Panel

Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement

Frame-Specific Components
Table 1-2. Platinum Frame-Specific Modules
Part Number Description
PM-ALARM-5 Alarm module for 5RU frames; monitors power supplies and
fans; provides both LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and
allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters
within a Platinum frame (e.g., signal presence, etc.) (see
page 35 for more information)
PT-ALARM Alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames; monitors
power supplies and fans; provides both LEDs and relay alarm
contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based
on parameters within a Platinum frame (e.g., signal presence,
etc.) (see page 41 for more information)
PM5-CBP Communications back panel module for 5RU frames;
interfaces between communications connectors and resource
modules (see page 29 for more information)
PT-CBP Communications back panel module for 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU frames; interfaces between communications connectors
and resource modules (see page 29 for more information)
PM-FAN-5 Fan module for 5RU frames; cools all modules (see page 55 for
more information)
PM-FAN-8 Fan module for 9RU frames; cools all modules (see page 55 for
more information)
PT-FAN-14 Fan modules for 15RU and 28RU frames; cool input, output,
PT-FAN-16 and resource modules (see page 55 for more information)
PM-MI-5 Module interconnect; passive central signal distribution
PM-MI-9 modules for Platinum frames (see page 28 for more
PT-MI-15 information)
PT-MI-28
PT-PD Power distribution module; interfaces with power supplies and
distributes power to a Platinum system (see page 49 for more
information)
PT-PS AC power supply module (see page 46 for more information)
PT-PS-DC DC power supply module (see page 46 for more information)
PT-RES Resource module; provides control logic for a Platinum frame
(see page 33 for more information)
PT-SYNC Sync module; allows for distribution of 1-4 independent
channels of sync signals to input and output modules placed
within a Platinum frame (see page 57 for more information)
PT-SYNC-MI Module interconnect; central signal distribution module for a
Platinum frame (see page 63 for more information)

Module-Specific Components
Input Modules
Note
See “Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input,
Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware” on page 241 and “Installing
Input and Output Modules” on page 246 for information about installing
input modules. See “Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for
Fiber Optical Modules” on page 250 for information about installing fiber
optical modules.
Table 1-3. Input Modules: 5RU and 9RU Frames

PM-ADC-IB Audio A/D input module (see page 110 for more information)
PM-ADCT-IB Audio A/D input module with TDM capability (see page 120
for more information)
PM-AEB-IB AES input front module (see page 87 for more information)
PM-AEC-IB
PM-AEBT-IB AES input front module with TDM capability (see page 94 for
PM-AECT-IB more information)
PM-DEC-IB Video A/D input module (decoder) (see page 103 for more
information)
PT-HS1310S-IB Fiber optical receiver module (see page 132 for more
information)
PM-HS-IB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any
digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s (see page 69 for
more information)
PM-HS-IB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any
more information)
PM-S-IB Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s (see page 78 for more
information)
PM-S-IB+ Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
information)
Table 1-4. Input Modules:15RU and 28RU Frames

PT-ADC-IB Audio A/D input module (see page 110 for more information)
PT-ADCT-IB Audio A/D input module with TDM capability (see page 120

Table 1-4. Input Modules:15RU and 28RU Frames (Continued)

PT-AEB-IB AES input front module (see page 87 for more information)
PT-AEC-IB
PT-AEBT-IB AES input front module with TDM capability (see page 94 for
PT-AECT-IB more information)
PT-DEC-IB Video A/D input module (decoder) (see page 103 for more
information)
PT-HS1310S-IB Fiber optical receiver module (see page 132 for more
information)
PT-HS-IB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any
more information)
PT-HS-IB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any
more information)
PT-S-IB Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
information)
PT-S-IB+ Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal
information)
Output Modules
Note
Input and Output Modules” on page 246 for information about installing
output modules. See “Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures
for Fiber Optical Modules” on page 250 for information about installing
fiber optical modules.
Table 1-5. Output Modules: 5RU and 9RU Frames

PM-AEB-OB AES balanced/unbalanced (coaxial) output front module (see
PM-AEC-OB page 164 for more information)
PM-AEBT-OB AES output front module with TDM capability (see page 172
PM-AECT-OB for more information)
PM-DAC-OB AES to analog audio converter output module (see page 188 for
more information)
PM-DACT-OB Audio D/A output module with TDM capability (see page 195

Table 1-5. Output Modules: 5RU and 9RU Frames (Continued)

PM-ENC-DOB SDI to analog video encoder module and dual output back panel
PM-ENC-OB SDI to analog video encoder module (see page 181 for more
information)
PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber optical transmitter module (see page 204 for more
information)
PM-HSR-DOB Dual wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support
bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with
reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual
outputs (see page 142 for more information)
PM-HSR-OB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with reclocking for
all standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 142 for
more information)
PM-HSR-OB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 148 for more
information)
PM-SR-DOB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital
signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for all
standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see
PM-SR-OB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital
standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 154 for more
information)
PM-SR-OB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s data rate (see page 159 for more information)
Table 1-6. Output Modules: 15RU and 28RU Frames

PT-AEB-OB AES balanced/unbalanced (coaxial) output front module (see
PT-AEC-OB page 164 for more information)
PT-AEBT-OB AES balanced/unbalanced (coaxial) output front module with
PT-AECT-OB TDM capability (see page 172 for more information)
PT-DAC-OB AES to analog audio converter output module (see page 188 for
more information)
PT-DACT-OB Audio D/A output module with TDM capability (see page 195
PT-ENC-DOB SDI to analog video encoder module and dual output back panel

Table 1-6. Output Modules: 15RU and 28RU Frames (Continued)

PT-ENC-OB SDI to analog video encoder module (see page 181 for more
information)
PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber optical transmitter module (see page 204 for more
information)
PT-HSR-DOB Dual wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support
bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with
reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual
outputs (see page 142 for more information)
PT-HSR-OB Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
all standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 142 for
more information)
PT-HSR-OB+ Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel
270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 148 for more
information)
PT-SR-DOB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital
standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see
PT-SR-OB Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital
standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 154 for more
information)
PT-SR-OB+ Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital
signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for
270 Mb/s data rate (see page 159 for more information)
Crosspoint Modules
Note
Crosspoint Modules” on page 248 for information about installing
crosspoint modules.
Table 1-7. Crosspoint Modules

PM-40×32-3G5 3 Gb/s 40×32 crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 214
PM-64×64-X9 64×64 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 216 for
more information)

Table 1-7. Crosspoint Modules (Continued)

PM-128×128-X9 128×128 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 218 for
more information)
PM-128×128-3G9 3 Gb/s 128×128 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see
PT-128×256-X15 128×256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU frames (see
PT-128×256-X28 page 222 for more information)
PT-128×256-3G15 3 Gb/s 128×256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU frames
PT-128×256-3G28 (see page 222 for more information)
PM-ATDM9-X5 9×8 TDM crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 224 for
more information)
PM-ATDM16-X9 16×16 TDM crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 224
PT-ATDM16-X15 16×16 TDM crosspoint module for 15RU frames (see page 224
Output Monitoring Modules
Note
See “Installing Output Monitoring Modules” on page 256 for information
about installing output monitoring modules.
Table 1-8. Output Monitoring Modules

PT-HSR-OM HD/SD output monitoring input/output module (see page 235

Back Panel Input/Output (I/O) Modules
Note
See “Installing Back Panel Modules” on page 258 for information about
installing back panel modules.
Table 1-9. Back Panel Modules

PT-A2-BP Analog stereo audio back module
PT-A2-DTB Terminal block adapter, accommodates wiring of individual
signals to a frame (see page 123 and page 189 for more
information)
PT-AEB-IBP AES balanced input back module (see page 88 and page 95 for
corresponding input modules)
PT-AEB-OBP AES balanced output back module (see page 165 for corresponding
output module)
PT-AEC-BOC Coaxial AES break-out cable for use with PM-AEC-IBP,
PM-AEC-OBP, PT-AEC-IBP, and PT-AEC-OBP back modules
(see page 88, page 95, and page 165 for more information)
PT-AEC-IBP AES coaxial input back module (see page 88 for corresponding
input module)
PT-AEC-OBP AES coaxial output back module (see page 165 for corresponding
output module)
PT-AECT-IBP Coaxial AES audio input back module with PT-AEC-BOC
(requires PT-x-ATDM-XPT)
PT-AECT-OBP Coaxial AES audio output back module with PT-AEC-BOC
(requires PT-x-ATDM-XPT)
PT-FO-BMI Fiber optical input back module (see page 132 for corresponding
input modules)
PT-FO-BMO Fiber optical output back module (see page 204 for corresponding
output modules)
PT-V-BP 8-BNC back module (HS, S, ENC, DEC)

Front Panel LED Indicators

The front panel LED indicators originate on the resource module(s) and power
supply module(s).
• Status LEDs indicate power supply status, resource module usage, and link
light indicators for Ethernet communications ports.
• Alarm LEDs indicate user-defined alarm conditions.
The LEDs on the front of these two module types shine through a lens in the
front panel door. These LED indicators are shown in Figure 1-8.
These front panel LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the
frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each
voltage rail and the power supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource
module provide status information of the frame’s resource module. These
indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a
failure condition exists.
Caution
Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the PT-RES
resource module has experienced a failure condition and needs to be
rebooted. Reboot the PT-RES module as soon as possible, and then
notify Customer Service.

Figure 1-8. Front Panel LED Indicators

Control Features
Your Platinum router makes use of the most innovative control systems
available on the market today. The operating system used for the Platinum
router is a real-time embedded operating system that uses an interrupt-driven
and priority-based task scheduling algorithm to control the operations of the
router. This means that switches will occur in a timely manner, which allows the
Platinum router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is crucial to the
success of the facility.
Physical
The control system reports information related to the physical properties of the
control subsystem components, such as
• Number of control modules actually installed
• Hardware revision(s) of installed modules
• Number of coprocessors actually installed
• Type, number and revision of internal control communications network
components that are installed.
Parametric
The control system reports information related to the control system itself, such
as
• Number of operational logic/resource modules
• Condition of operation (e.g., active/standby, etc.)
• Installed firmware/software version(s)
• Available memory (volatile/nonvolatile/internal or external)
• Installed communications ports
• Configuration parameters important to the control system (e.g.,
communication port parameters, condition of ports, ports in use)
• Installed file systems/memory devices
Signal
Physical
The control system reports information related to the physical components
involved in switching, monitoring and/or processing signals/data streams, such
as
• Number of components (e.g., input/output modules, etc.) that may be
installed
• Number of components installed (e.g., number of crosspoint modules,
processing modules, other signal handling components)
• Type of components installed

• Hardware, software, and firmware revision(s) for each installed component

• Condition (operational/standby/fault) of each device
Parametric
The control system can report and set, as appropriate, information about
configuration (or can provide the status) of all components involved in signal
switching, processing, or monitoring, such as
• Status of all controllable or readable settings/values on installed
components
These settings and values include all parameters affecting the signal path
(e.g. processing settings such as EQ, gain, reclocker) or otherwise related to
the signal path (e.g., signal presence; reclocker lock; sync signal presence,
type, and lock).
Note
Other than physical frame failure alarms (e.g. fans, power supplies,
etc.), no default alarms are specified.
• “Logical” configuration of the signal components (e.g. partitioning, offsets)

• All parameters may be defined as alarms with user-definable alarm states.
• All alarms support user-settable threshold and hysteresis with local and
remote alarm acknowledgement and disable functionality.
CCS Control System Integration Requirements

The Platinum router is supported by the CCS Navigator architecture with the
router module installed. Also, support for SNMP interface is routed directly to
the frame; no gateway is required.
Real-time Requirements
All switches referenced to the same sync signal will occur within the same
vertical interval. If multiple sync signals are provided to the frame, all switches
will occur within the same number of frames as there are sync signals (i.e., if
three sync signals are provided, all switches will occur within three frames). If
no sync signals are present, the switches occur asynchronously after a
reasonable time-out period (less than 0.1 seconds from reception of command),
resulting in deterministic operation. If a sync signal was present and then
removed, the switches will remain timed to that sync for a specified period of
time (based on sync type); this provides robust operation in case of sync failure
in the system (e.g., wiring fault, etc.).

Applications Integration
The CCS control system supports the Platinum router via the new Navigator
architecture with the Router module installed, and is available for control and
monitoring from any Harris-or SNMP-supported control application. And with
RouterMapper, the frame supports upload/download of configurations and
macro/salvo commands.
All reportable/controllable information is available through a central/core
Programming interface that allows any or all protocol interfaces (terminal,
message-based or otherwise) to monitor, control, or query these values, to the
extent that is provided for by each protocol or interface and that satisfies
product feature requirements.
Frame
The “frame” is the physical frame that houses the router and provides the
physical structure to which all hardware components are mounted, power
supplies and their associated fans and means of distributing power, and all fans
responsible for airflow through the frame. Physical information related to this
system involves the presence/absence and type of the installed components.
Parametric information related to this system generally describes status of the
physical components operation.
Physical
The control system allows the reporting of physical frame components installed
in the system, such as
• Frame size and frame firmware revision(s)
• Number of cooling fans installed
• Number of power supplies installed
Parametric
The control system allows the reporting (as simple status parameters) the
condition of all frame related status information, such as
• Upper-, lower-, and control-fan group alarms
• Power supply operation for all installed power supplies
• Condition of power supply voltage rails
• Internal temperature of frame
• External ambient temperature
Control Subsystem
The control subsystem consists of components such as resource modules and
associated firmware/software programs, coprocessor hardware and associated
firmware/software programs, and the internal (to the product) networks
responsible for their communications.

Control Panels
You can control the Platinum routing system with the Harris standard line of
control panels via X-Y over serial, coax, or Ethernet. You can find control panel
operating information in the following manuals:
• NUCLEUS network control panel – NUCLEUS Control Panel Installation
and Operation Manual
• LCD programmable control panel – RCP-IDe Control Panels Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual
• ABA control panels – RCP-ABA Programmable Control Panel Series
Configuration and Operation Manual and RCP-ABAe Alphanumeric
Breakaway Programmable Control Panel Series Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual
• Programmable control panels – RCP-p Programmable Control Panel Series
Configuration and Operation Manual
Note
You can download copies of these manuals from our website.
Configuration and System Status Information

Card-edge controls located on the front of the resource modules provide
configuration and basic system status information. The card-edge controls
replace DIP switches. You can find more information about card-edge controls
in Chapter 8: “Configuration” starting on page 268.
Protocol Support
The Platinum router supports X-Y (serial, coax, and Ethernet) and SNMP
directly to the frame. Other protocol modules supported within the standard
protocol architecture are uploadable for use in the Platinum router.
Integration Required With Other Products, Applications, Services

Platinum routers coexist in our CCS control system, and can be controlled and
monitored from any Harris-or SNMP-supported control application.
Software Control Applications

There are several software options available to control your Harris products
through the Platinum router.
CCS Pilot™
CCS Pilot is an integrated software application that contains the tools you need
to configure, control, monitor, and secure access to our equipment on your
network, regardless of how geographically dispersed your equipment is.

CCS Navigator™
CCS Navigator software provides graphical tools that will enable you to create
easy-to-use graphical pages that visually represent your network’s many
devices, systems, and environments. These graphical pages allow you to
consolidate and ease network-wide status monitoring, leading to more efficient
deployment of human resources for monitoring and troubleshooting tasks.
RouterMapper™
Our configuration utility for programming the Platinum router for operation is
RouterMapper, an easy-to-use Microsoft® Windows®1-based application for
programming RouterWorks®, other router frames, control panels, and the
Opus™ master controller.
Note
For a more information about these software products, contact our Sales
Department or visit our website.
Operating Modes
Harris also offers a wide variety of programmable control panels that can be
used to control your Platinum router. The Programmable Panel Series uses
RouterMapper and/or Navigator to program a panel for customization. Visit our
website, see your dealer, or contact us for more information on the
Programmable Panel Series of control panels.
See Chapter 8: “Configuration” for more information on the control and
configuration of the Platinum routing system.
1 “Windows”
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Frame Specifications
The specifications in this section are for the Platinum frame and system-wide
components. Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed
descriptions.
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 1-10. Power Supply Specifications

Item Specification
Power Maximum 620 W power supply
Output V1 = +5 VDC @ 10A
V2 = +24 VDC @ 12A
V3 = +24 VDC @ 12A
Current sharing Diode isolated
Hot swappable
Performance temperature 41°F (5°C) to 104°F (40°C) at 100% power rating
Operating temperature 32° F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C) at 100% power rating
Table 1-11. Frame Indicators

Item Specification
Control Indicators
5RU CPU2: PWR, ACTV, FAN
9RU CPU1: PWR, ACTV, FAN
15RU
28RU
Power Supply Indicators for Fully-Configured Frame*
5RU PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
9RU PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
15RU PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
28RU PS8: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS6: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS7: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS5: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
* A “fully-configured” frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other mod-
ules and options, installed.


Chapter 2
Frame Modules
Overview
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the frame-specific modules
available for the Platinum router. Each module is described in terms of its
individual operation, controllable parameters (if applicable), installation,
configuration, functional block diagram (if applicable), and specifications (if
applicable).
This chapter covers the following topics:
• “PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames” on page 35
• “PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames” on page
41
• “PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module” on page 29
• “PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame” on page 51
• “PM-FAN-5: Fan Module for 5RU Frames” on page 53
• “PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: Fan Modules for 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU Frames” on page 55
• “PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect” on page
28
• “PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module” on page 49
• “PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module/ PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module”
on page 46
• “PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module” on page 33
• “PT-SYNC: Sync Module” on page 57
• “PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module” on page 63

PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module
Interconnect
Operation
The PM-MI-5 (for 5RU frames), PM-MI-9 (for 9RU frames), PT-MI-15 (for
15RU frames), or PT-MI-28 (for 28RU frames) module interconnect is the
central signal distribution module for the Platinum frame. This module provides
all of the signal distribution between the input, output, and crosspoint modules.
Along with the signal distribution, this module interconnects the control
infrastructure and distributes the required power to the appropriate signal
modules. There are no active components on the module interconnect.
Installation
The module interconnect is installed at our manufacturing facility. This module
is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please
contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
This module requires no specialized configuration procedures.

PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel

Module
Operation
Figure 2-1. PM5-CBP/PT-CBP Communications Back Panel
The PM5-CBP (for 5RU frames) or PT-CBP (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU
frames) communications back panel provides the interface between all
communications connectors and the resource modules. All control ports remain
mute until, and only if, the router has fully booted and has established
communications. Even in a powered-down state, a router connected to any
communications system must not interfere with that system, and therefore must
not violate the communications standard (RS-232, RS-422, IEEE 802, etc.)
when in this state. A temperature sensor on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP monitors the
external ambient temperature.
These connector types are available on every PM5-CBP and PT-CBP module:
• Two X-Y ports
• Four sync ports
• Two serial ports
• Two Ethernet ports
• One USB port
• One alarm port
X-Y Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes two isolated coaxial X-Y ports with
auto-switchover functionality in redundant X-Y operation. (When used with a
safe hub in a star configuration, the frame automatically switches over to the
second X-Y port when failure is detected on the first; this implies that only one
is active at any given time). In standard operation, both X-Y ports are active and
repeat communications on the X-Y bus between each other. This function can
be set via the card-edge control interface on the resource module.

Sync Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes four looping sync inputs. Each sync
input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or
AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal
detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are made
available to and are distributed by the resource modules to every crosspoint and
output monitoring I/O module in a frame. The sync signals distributed from the
resource module will remain undisturbed when switching over to a redundant
resource module. In addition, the resource modules automatically generate and
distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is
present. If needed, optional sync distribution modules may be added to the
frame to distribute external and internal sync signals to all input and output
modules. These sync distribution modules also support redundant operation,
and have the capability to seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is
removed.
Table 2-10 on page 58 shows the Sync Reference types and default switch
points supported by Platinum.
Serial Ports
Frames support two serial ports with either RS-232 or RS-422 communication
standards. This setting is configurable via the card-edge control interface on the
resource module. Standard baud rates (9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200) are
supported on the frame, and are configurable via the card-edge control interface
on the resource module.
Table 2-1. RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Pin Function
1 Frame Ground
2 RxD (Data received by router)
3 TxD (Data sent by router)
4 Data Terminal Ready*
5 Ground
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)*
7 Request to Send (RTS)**
8 Clear to Send (RTS)**
9 Frame Ground
* Pins 4 and 6 connected internally.
** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally

Table 2-2. RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Connection to
Signal
Pin Description Remote Computer
(Tributary)
(Controller)
1 FG Frame ground Frame ground
2 Ta (Tx-) Transmitted data Ra (Rx-)
(twisted pair)
7 Tb (Tx+) Rb (Rx+)
6 Tc Received data shield Received data shield
8 Ra (Rx-) Received data Ta (Tx-)
(twisted pair)
3 Rb (Rx+) Tb (Tx+)
4 Rc Transmitted data shield Transmitted data shield
9 FG Frame ground Frame ground
5 SP (Not connected) (Not connected)
Ethernet Ports
Frames support two isolated Ethernet ports, and one of these ports supports Fast
Ethernet (10/100 full and half duplex communications). The connectors follow
IEEE standards for the interface.
Note
The resource module provide one host-based USB-A port for file transfer
(USB flash module interconnect).
USB Port
The PM5-CBP/PT-CBP contains a peripheral USB-B port used for application
interface and terminal emulation.
Alarm Port
An alarm relay port on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP supports normally open and
normally closed operation for frame alarms (for module failure, fan failure, or
power supply failure). In addition to these standard ports, an additional “ready
line” port is available to synchronize operations in a multi-frame system where
other synchronization support is unavailable (e.g., NTP).

Installation
All communications back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing
facility. This module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace
this module, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration

PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module

Operation
Figure 2-2. PT-RES Resource Module
The resource module (PT-RES) provides control logic for the Platinum frame.
All parameters and settings are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent any
changes from occurring due to a power interruption. Consequently, no
power-down condition or sequence will affect the router control system in such
a way as to prevent full recovery.
Each Platinum frame can have up to two PT-RES modules operating
redundantly. If one module detects failure of the other module, it will switch
over control and continue router operation.
The PT-RES module also provides the sync processing necessary to determine
the switch timing for the frame. This includes the standard sync separators for
AES, PAL, NTSC, or Tri-Level HD reference inputs, along with support for
Network Time Protocol (NTP), if an NTP server is available in the system. The
NTP functionality supports time-sensitive operations, logging, and security.
Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD
Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of
sync signal detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals
are available to and distributed by the PT-RES module to every crosspoint,
streaming, and output monitoring module in the frame. Since the PT-RES
module distributes these sync signals, it can tristate its sync outputs when a
redundant module is present, and seamlessly switch over when the redundant
module fails or is removed. In addition, the PT-RES module automatically
generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external
sync input is present.

The PT-RES module, and necessary communications between the crosspoint

and I/O, support line accurate switching per RP-168. Switch setting resolution is
in banks of 8 outputs (e.g., outputs 1-8 switches referenced to sync 1, outputs
9-16 switches referenced to sync 2, outputs 17-512 switches referenced sync 3,
etc.). For customers not using RP-168, the Platinum router supports “advanced”
reference configuration, allowing the customer to set the time from the
incoming sync pulse for switching.
Each PT-RES module contains a card-edge control interface for frame
configuration, and has LED indicators for the following:
• The green LED labelled “POWER” is the power supply indicator. It shows
that power is present on the module and that the +24V power rails are
operational.
• The green LED labelled “ACT RES” is the active resource module indicator
This LED shows which module is active in redundant configurations. It also
blinks to indicate when the inactive module is downloading information
from the active module.
• The green LED labeled “ENET LINK” displays the standard Ethernet link
LED (in addition to the Link LED present on the connector at the rear of the
frame).
• The two yellow and red LEDs labeled “ALARM” indicate user-defined
alarm conditions.
Caution
Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the
PT-RES resource module has experienced a failure condition and
needs to be rebooted. Reboot the PT-RES module as soon as
possible, and then notify Customer Service.
Along with these LEDs, there are labeled power and ground test points
accessible on the front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
Installation
All PT-RES modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See page 259
for information about replacing the PT-RES module. If you need to purchase
additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration

PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames

Operation
Figure 2-3. PM-ALARM-5 Module
The alarm module for 5RU frames (PM-ALARM-5) monitors the core
operating components of the Platinum system, and reports critical component
failures via an external interface, so that you can take any actions necessary to
maintain system integrity.
• PM-ALARM-5 modules can control PM-FAN-5 fan speed and report fan
failures.
• PM-ALARM-5 modules can externally report four user-defined alarms
comprised of any mix of signals reported to the alarm module.
• In addition to internal alarms, PM-ALARM-5 allows you the ability to
monitor legacy equipment via two remote inputs.
The PM-ALARM-5 module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located at
the bottom. It provides normally open and normally closed alarm relay contacts
for all frame- and user-configurable alarm options. This setup allows you to
configure alarm contacts based on internal frame/port information (e.g., signal
presence on output 1 fails).
The module is hot swappable and interconnects between the fan module and the
module interconnect. (See page 257 for the procedure for field expansion of
alarm modules.) The module reports alarms through the RouterMapper or
Navigator software interface, and through hardware via relay contact closures
and illuminated LEDs.
Controlling Fan Speed

The PM-ALARM-5 module allows you to control the speed of PM-FAN-5 via
RouterMapper configuration utility software. The selectable fan speeds are
OFF, low, medium, and high. To set the fan speed parameters, you must access
the control components (listed on the Detected Matrices tab of the

corresponding Platinum frame). Follow the appropriate steps (as described in

the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide) to open the Module
Parameters list box, and then change the Fan Speed_x parameter instance to the
desired setting.
Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures

The PM-ALARM-5 monitors the status signal of core components and report
any instance of a critical failure. Reporting is done internally (through controls)
and externally (via relay contact closure and illuminated red LEDs).
Figure 2-4. PM-ALARM-5 LEDs
The PM-ALARM-5 module provides eight alarm outputs:

• Four user-definable internal alarms
On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates
directly to the resource module via the PRTI interface.This communication
provides you with access to any status signal reported within the entire
Platinum system.
• Two user-definable remote input failure alarms
User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment
alarm/failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest
versions of control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper.
• One power supply failure alarm
Each power supply will provide a presence signal and four critical alarm
signals: +24VA, +24VB, +5VL, and PS-FAN. All four components are
critical to power supply and frame operation. If any the components reports
a failure, a red LED will be illuminated to signal the critical fault. An LED
that is not illuminated indicates that no alarm conditions exist.
• One fan failure alarm
The PM-FAN-5 fan module reports an alarm for each of 6 fans. On the
PM-FAN-5 module, there is one LED for each fan. When a fan failure alarm
occurs, you will be able to determine the fan failure by the color of the
corresponding LED.
• A green LED indicates that all fans are operational.

• A red LED indicates that at least one fan is not operational.
• An LED that is not illuminated indicates that fans have been turned off.
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
• Normally open/normally closed
• “Normally closed” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition does not exist and the frame is powered
• “Normally open” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition exists
• Relay common
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions:
Table 2-3. Alarm Conditions

Alarm Condition Description
PS fail Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure (in
systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm will be
asserted if any power supply fails)
Fan (module) fail Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame
cooling fans
User-defined outputs 1-4 Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment
alarm/failures and report those failures through control
software
Remote inputs 1-2 Provide access to any status signal reported within the
Platinum system
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the
alarm condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to
detect when power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted.If a relay fails or
if the circuit controlling a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the
corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the frame loses power, the alarm relay
will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will be asserted.
Alarm port
NC = Normally closed;
1
14
contact shorted with common

15
3
16
when alarm condition exists

4
NC
17
Common or frame not powered

18
6
19
NO
7
20
NO = Normally open;
21
9
22

10
23
11
when alarm does not exist

24
12
Alarm and frame is powered

25
13
condition
detected
Relay closed when alarm not asserted
Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-5. Typical Alarm Operation

PM-ALARM-5 Pinouts
Table 2-4. PM-ALARM-5 Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin No. Description Pin No. Description

1 Reserved 14 Normally closed (power supply alarm)
2 Common (user-defined 1) 15 Normally open (power supply alarm)
3 Normally closed (user-defined 1) 16 Common (Power supply alarm)
4 Normally open (user-defined 1) 17 Normally closed (fan alarm)
5 Common (user-defined 2) 18 Normally open (fan alarm)
6 Normally closed (user-defined 2) 19 Common (fan alarm)
7 Normally open (user-defined 2) 20 Floating
8 Common (user-defined 3) 21 Remote In 1
9 Normally closed (user-defined 3) 22 Common In 1
10 Normally open (user-defined 3) 23 Floating
11 Common (user-defined 4) 24 Remote in 2
12 Normally closed (user-defined 4) 25 Common in 2
13 Normally open (user-defined 4)
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Installing
Alarm Modules” on page 257 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm
modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your
dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration

Controllable Parameters
The PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that
are enabled and/or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters
and/or Module Parameters list box1. Follow the appropriate steps (as described
in the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide) to open the list
box, and then change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters
marked with the [RO] designator are “read-only.”
Table 2-5. PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List

[RO] = Read-only parameter
Parameter Description User Range

User Configurable Alarm Out_1 Provides alarm reporting for any • No alarm
• status signal reported within the • Alarm
• Platinum system
User Configurable Alarm Out_4
Fan Speed_1 Controls fan speeds on the PM-FAN-5 • Off
• module • Low
• • Med
Fan Speed_6 • Hi
PS Alarm_1 [RO] Trips relay if power to the module is • No

• lost • Yes
•
PS Alarm_1 [RO]
FAN Alarm [RO] I/O fan fail alarm • No
• Yes
FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Control area fans • No
• Yes
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for all parameters that 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
require it
Power Supply Presence_1 [RO] Power supply failure alarm • No
• • Yes
•
Power Supply Presence_16 [RO]
+24VA Fail_1 [RO] +24 VA alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+24VA Fail_16 [RO]
+24VB Fail_1 [RO] +24 VB alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+24VB Fail_8 [RO]
1
The Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab.
The Module Parameters list box is available through the Detected Matrices tab.

Table 2-5. PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List (Continued)


+5VL Fail_1 [RO] +5VL alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+5VL Fail_16 [RO]
PS Fan Fail_1 [RO] Internal power supply fan alarm • No
• • Yes
•
PS Fan Fail_16 [RO]
Power Supply Zone_1 [RO] Determines the zone that a power • Zone 1
• supply powers • Zone 2
• • Zone 3
Power Supply Zone_16 [RO] • Zone 4
External Alarm Enable_1 Enables alarms on GPI inputs to alarm • No

External Alarm nable_2 module • Yes
External Alarm Trigger Valve_1 Determines value on GPI input that • Low
External Alarm Trigger Valve_2 will trigger alarm • High
External Alarm Alarm reporting based on GPI input • No

• Yes
Fan Control Mode Determines if fan speed is • Auto
automatically- or user-controlled • Manual

PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and

28RU Frames
Operation
Figure 2-6. PT-ALARM Module
The alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames (PT-ALARM) monitors
the core operating components of the Platinum system, and reports critical
component failures via an external interface, so that you can take any actions
necessary to maintain system integrity. PT-ALARM can externally report four
user-defined alarms comprised of any mix of signals reported to the alarm
module. In addition to internal alarms, PT-ALARM allows you the ability to
monitor legacy equipment via two remote inputs.
PT-ALARM provides eight alarm outputs:
• Two critical system component failure alarms: power supply and fan
• Four user definable internal alarms
• Two user-definable external alarms
You can control alarm parameters as follows:
• User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment
alarm/failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest
versions of control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper.
• On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates
directly to the resource module via the PIPE interface.This communication
provides you with access to any status signal reported within the entire
Platinum system.
The PT-ALARM module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located
mid-frame between the 2 fan modules in a 28RU system, and at the bottom for
9RU and 15RU systems. It provides normally open and normally closed alarm
relay contacts for all frame- and user-configurable alarm options. This setup
allows you to configure alarm contacts based on internal frame/port information
(e.g., signal presence on output 1 fails).

The module is hot swappable and interconnects between both fan modules and
the module interconnect. (See page 257 for the procedure for field expansion of
alarm modules.) The module reports alarms through software via the PIPE
interface, and through hardware via relay contact closures and illuminated
LEDs.
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
• Normally open/normally closed
• “Normally closed” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition does not exist and the frame is powered
• “Normally open” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition exists
• Relay common
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions:
Table 2-6. Alarm Conditions

Alarm Condition Description
PS fail Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure (in
systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm will be
asserted if any power supply fails)
Fan (module) fail Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame
cooling fans
User-defined outputs 1-4 Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment
alarm/failures and report those failures through control
software
Remote inputs 1-2 Provide access to any status signal reported within the
Platinum system
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the
alarm condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to
detect when power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted. If a relay fails or
if the circuit controlling a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the
corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the frame loses power, the alarm relay
will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will be asserted.
Alarm port
NC = Normally closed;
1
14

15
3
16
when alarm condition exists

4
NC
17
Common or frame not powered

18
6
19
NO
7
20
NO = Normally open;
21
9
22

10
23
11
when alarm does not exist

24
12
Alarm and frame is powered

25
13
condition
detected
Relay closed when alarm not asserted
Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-7. Typical Alarm Operation

Pinout Diagram
Table 2-7. PT-ALARM Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin No. Description Pin No. Description

1 Reserved 14 Normally Closed (Power supply alarm)
2 Common (User-defined 1) 15 Normally Open (Power supply alarm)
3 Normally Closed (User-defined 1) 16 Common (Power supply alarm)
4 Normally Open (User-defined 1) 17 Normally Closed (Fan alarm)
5 Common (User-defined 2) 18 Normally Open (Fan alarm)
6 Normally Closed (User-defined 2) 19 Common (Fan alarm)
7 Normally Open (User-defined 2) 20 Floating
8 Common (User-defined 3) 21 Remote In 1
9 Normally Closed (User-defined 3) 22 Common In 1
10 Normally Open (User-defined 3) 23 Floating
11 Common (User-defined 4) 24 Remote In 2
12 Normally Closed (User-defined 4) 25 Common In 2
13 Normally Open (User-defined 4)
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Installing
Alarm Modules” on page 257 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm
Configuration

The PT-ALARM Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that
are enabled and/or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters
Table 2-8. PT-ALARM Parameters List

User Configurable Alarm Out_1 Provides alarm reporting for any • No alarm
• status signal reported within the • Alarm
• Platinum system
User Configurable Alarm Out_4
PS Alarm_1 [RO] Trips relay if power to the module is • No
• lost • Yes
•
PS Alarm_16 [RO]
Upper Fan Alarm I/O fan fail alarm • No
• Yes
FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Control area fans • No
• Yes
Power Supply Presence_1 [RO] Power supply failure alarm • No
• • Yes
•
Power Supply Presence_16 [RO]
+24VA Fail_1 [RO] +24VA alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+24VA Fail_16 [RO]
+24VB Fail_1 [RO] +24VB alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+24VB Fail_16 [RO]
+5VL Fail_1 [RO] +5VL alarm failure • No
• • Yes
•
+5VL Fail_16 [RO]
PS Fan Fail_1 [RO] Internal power supply fan alarm • No
• • Yes
•
PS Fan Fail_16 [RO]
1 The
Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab.
Table 2-8. PT-ALARM Parameters List (Continued)


Power Supply Zone_1 [RO] Determines zone that a power supply • Zone 1
• powers • Zone 2
• • Zone 3
Power Supply Zone_16 [RO] • Zone 4
Lower Fan Alarm I/O fan fail alarm • No

• Yes
External Alarm Enable Enables alarms on GPI inputs to alarm • No
module • Yes
External Alarm Trigger Value Determines value on GPI input that • Low
will trigger alarm • High
External Alarm Enables alarm reporting based on GPI • No

input • Yes

PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module/

PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module
Operation
PT-PS AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC DC Power Supply Module
Figure 2-8. PT-PS Power Supply Modules
Each Platinum 5RU and 9RU frame comes with one power supply module as a
standard feature. A fully-configured1 5RU or 9RU frame needs one power
supply.
Each Platinum 15RU frame comes with one power supply module as a standard
feature. A fully-configured 15RU frame needs two power supplies.
Each Platinum 28RU frame comes with two power supply modules as a
standard feature. A fully-configured 28RU frame needs four power supplies.
• PT-PS power supply module: The 750 W universal input (100 to 240 VAC
input) Platinum power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one
isolated 5 V rail to the frame. See “Installing Power Supplies” on page 260
for details on power supply replacement.
• PT-PS-DC power supply module: The 750 W DC input (-40 to -65 VDC
input) Platinum power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one
isolated 5 V rail to the frame. See “Installing Power Supplies” on page 260
for details on power supply replacement.
1
A “fully-configured” frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other modules
and options, installed.

Note
The Platinum frame is configured at the factory to operate either from an
AC input voltage or a DC input voltage, but not both. This configuration
is based on a customer’s order and cannot be changed once the
frame leaves the factory. The AC and DC power supply modules are
mechanically compatible with all Platinum frames and are similar in
appearance, so you can easily install the wrong power supply module
into a Platinum frame. For your safety, the configurations of both the AC
input voltage and DC input voltage Platinum frames are such that, if the
wrong power supply module is installed, no electrical fault will occur, no
circuit breakers will trip, and the power supply module will not attempt to
power up and will not be damaged. Most important,you will not be in any
danger. If you find that either an AC or a DC power supply module will not
power up in a Platinum frame that has been connected to the power
mains of a facility, you should first confirm the correct power supply
module was installed. Platinum frames configured to use 100-240 VAC
require the AC power supply module; Platinum frames configured to use
-40 to -65 VDC require the DC power supply module.
Installation
All power supplies are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Installing
Power Supplies” on page 260 for the procedure for field expansion of power
supplies. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your
Configuration
Specifications
Table 2-9. PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications

Specification
Item PT-PS PT-PS-DC
Input voltage Universal AC input (100 VAC to 240 VAC) -40 VDC to -65 VDC
Input frequency 47 – 63 Hz —
Power factor correction > 97% efficient, active, meets EN61000-3-2 —
as a Class A device when under 50% load
Inrush current ≤ 35 Amps peak at 264 VAC ≤ 35 Amps peak at -72 VDC
Power supply efficiency ≥ 75% at full load ≥ 75% at full load

Table 2-9. PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications (Continued)

Specification
Item PT-PS PT-PS-DC
Output voltages* † V1 = 5 VDC V1 = 5 VDC
V2 = 24 VDC V2 = 24 VDC
V3 = 24 VDC V3 = 24 VDC
Output currents 5 VDC @ 10 amps 5 VDC @ 10 amps
24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps
24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps
Output power 750 watts (continuous) 750 watts (continuous)
Line regulation < ± 0.1% < ± 0.1%
Load regulation ± 2.0% ± 2.0% for both 24 VDC outputs
+6.0/-2.0 % for 5 VDC output
Output noise 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth, measured 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth, measured
across 0.1 uF and 10 uF capacitors connected across 0.1 uF and 10 uF capacitors connected
in parallel) in parallel)
Overcurrent protection Non-destructively limit current to 120% Non-destructively limit current to 120%
rated load, square current limit with auto rated load, square current limit with auto
recovery recovery
Overvoltage protection Entire power supply shuts down if any output Entire power supply shuts down if any output
rail reaches 15% above rated voltage rail reaches 15% above rated voltage
Input polarity protection — No damage will occur if the input voltage
lines are connected with the incorrect
polarity
Current sharing Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable
(diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads (diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads
greater than 50% greater than 50%
Holdup time 20 milliseconds —
Indicators LEDs indicating 5 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V DC LEDs indicating 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 24 VDC
present and fan fail on front cover present and fan fail on front cover
LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage
rails or fan not deviation from specified rails or fan, not deviation from specified
voltages or fan speed voltages or fan speed
Alarms PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all
three voltage rails and cooling fan, and three voltage rails and cooling fan, and
makes these four status signals available at makes these four status signals available at
the main connector for remote monitoring the main connector for remote monitoring
MTBF > 250,000 hours @ 30°C (excludes fan life‡) > 250,000 hours @ 30° C (excludes fan life‡)
* All
outputs are isolated both from the chassis and from each other.
†5
VDC rail should rise to rated voltage 100 ms before the other two voltage rails.
‡ Fan MTBF per manufacturer’s specifications.

PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module

Operation
Figure 2-9. PM5-PD/PT-PD Power Distribution Module
The PM5-PD (for 5RU frames) and PT-PD (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames)
power distribution module is the interface between the power supplies and the
Platinum system. The PM5-PD/PT-PD module facilitates 2N power redundancy
through a configuration of internal and/or external power supplies. The
PM5-PD/PT-PD also provides the means for powering the rear fan module(s),
and acts as an intermediary point for the power supply alarm signals.
Power Distribution
On 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames, power is distributed throughout the
backplane via a bus bar. (The 5RU frames do not require a bus bar.)The bus bar
distributes power for each zone1. Each zone of the bus bar is divided into four
groupings (or distribution points) located evenly between every four I/O
modules.
Frame
• Platinum 5RU frames use one PM5-PD module, which is located at the
bottom of the frame. Platinum 5RU frames do not require a bus bar.
• Platinum 9RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top of
the frame. To properly distribute power, Platinum 9RU frames require a
single BUS-9 bus bar.
• Platinum 15RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top
of the frame. To properly distribute power, Platinum 15RU frames require a
single BUS-15 bus bar.
• Platinum 28RU frames use two PT-PD modules, located at the top and
bottom of the frame. The top PT-PD module distributes power to zones 1
and 2. The bottom PT-PD module distributes power to zones 3 and 4.
Fan Module
The PM5-PD/PT-PD supplies power to the fan module(s) via a 6-pin power
cable connector. See page 55 for more information about the fan module.
1
See “Installing Power Supplies” on page 260 for more information about power distribution
zones.

Power Redundancy
Power redundancy has been designed to meet a 2N criterion; that is, the
PM5-PD/PT-PD provides 2N redundancy as an option to the user. This
redundancy allows you to back up the router based on a fully independent AC
line. (For example: A 15RU frame requires two power supplies, but supports
four.) Redundancy within the frame is configurable via PS3 and PS4. (PS3 and
PS4 are configured at the factory to power zone 2). PS3-PS4 can be configured
to provide 2N redundancy for zone 1. Call your Customer Service
representative for more information.
Alarm Reporting
While the PM5-PD/PT-PD does not have any control requirements or reportable
parameters, it acts as intermediary device for alarm signals being passed from
power supplies to the alarm module.
Power Requirements
• +24 VA: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N
redundancy) the total power the +24 VA line can source is 1200 W.
• +24 VB: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N
redundancy) the total power the +24 VB line can source is 1200 W.
• +5 VL: Individually the +5 VL rail can source 10 amps. Once combined
(including 2N redundancy) the total power the +5 VL line can source is 200
W.
Installation
All power distribution modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. This
module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module,
please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
All power distribution modules are configured at our manufacturing facility.
This module is not user-configurable. If you need a customized configuration
for your location, please contact our Customer Service Department.

PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame

Operation
Figure 2-10. PT-EXPS External Power Supply Frame
Note
External redundancy is not needed on 5RU or 9RU frames. These frame
sizes already support the necessary number of redundant power
supplies.
The optional external power supply frame (PT-EXPS) provides 2N power

redundancy for expansion in high power applications. This frame holds up to
four power supplies. Each of these four supplies connect to the Platinum frame
via individual cables carrying two +24 volt rails, the +5 VL rail, and alarm
signal lines. The 15RU frames support one PT-EXPS, while the 28RU frame
supports two (one connected at the top and the other at the bottom of the 28RU
frame). Call your Customer Service representative for more information.
Installation
For a standard PT-EXPS unit installation, the units should be located as follows:
• 15RU – directly above the Platinum unit
• 28RU – 1 PT-EXPS unit installed directly above and 1 PT-EXPS unit
installed directly below the 28RU frame

This installation offers the optimal connection scheme. For non-standard

installation, extension cables are also available that allow the PT-EXPS unit to
be located up to 5 feet from the connection point of the Platinum frame. Consult
you Customer Service representative for non-standard installations.
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-EXPS
installation, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
The Platinum frame must be configured to interface with the PT-EXPS unit. All
new Platinum orders that include a PT-EXPS unit will be configured at the
manufacturing facility. For existing in-field Platinum units, please consult your
Customer Service representative to arrange proper frame configuration.

PM-FAN-5: Fan Module for 5RU Frames

Operation
Figure 2-11. PM-FAN-5 Fan Module
Note
In case of a fan failure, only individual fans will need replacement; the
entire fan module will not need to be replaced.
The fan module for 5RU frames (PM-FAN-5) contains 6 fans per module. A
5RU frame requires one PM-FAN-5 module. These fans are responsible for
cooling all installed modules. The fans draw air from the front of the frame and
exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is monitored by the PM-ALARM-5 for rotor
movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls. The fan module will produce
two failure alarms: one for failure of control section fans and one for failure of
I/O section fans. You will need to visually inspect the fan module to determine
which fan has failed. Control section fan failure will be reported as a critical
failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be reported as a general alarm.
The fan speed is variable, and can be adjusted via the control system (see
page 35). Each fan is accessible from the frame rear and connects to the fan
module via a three-pin locking connector to allow for removal and replacement
in the event of a fan failure.

Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Replacing
Fans” on page 262 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to
purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Configuration

PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: Fan Modules for

9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames
Operation
Figure 2-12. Platinum Fan Module (PT-FAN-16 Shown)
Note
In case of a fan failure, only individual fans will need replacement; the
entire fan module will not need to be replaced.
The Platinum fan module contains 8, 14 or 16 fans per module.

• A 9RU frame requires one PM-FAN-8 module.
• A 15RU frame requires one PT-FAN-16 module.
• A 28RU frame requires one PT-FAN-14 and one PT-FAN-16 module.
These fans are responsible for cooling all installed modules. The fans draw air
from the front of the frame and exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is monitored
by the PT-ALARM for rotor movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls.
The fan module will produce two failure alarms: one for failure of control
section fans and one for failure of I/O section fans. You will need to visually
inspect the fan module to determine which fan has failed. Control section fan
failure will be reported as a critical failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be
reported as a general alarm.
Fan modules maintain a constant speed and air flow whenever a frame is
powered. The fans are grouped by power zone, so that each group of fans is
responsible for cooling modules within a particular zone. Each fan is accessible
from the frame rear, and connects to the fan module via a three-pin locking
connector to allow for removal and replacement in the event of a fan failure.

Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Replacing
Fans” on page 262 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to
Department.
Configuration

PT-SYNC: Sync Module

Operation
Figure 2-13. PT-SYNC Module
Note
In 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the
crosspoint module. A separate sync module is not required.
As part of the Platinum routing system, the PT-SYNC module allows for the
distribution of up to four independent channels of sync signals to the various
input and output modules placed within the Platinum frame. Using BNC
connectors on the communications back panel (PT-CBP) located on the rear of
the frame, you can distribute AES digital audio (DARS), analog video
(black/burst), or HD tri-level sync to be used as required by the various I/O
modules. If no sync signal is presented to channel 1, the PT-SYNC module
automatically distributes a timing reference signal (generated on the resource
module) to be used for internal lock and switching purposes. If the TDM
subsystem is used to route audio within the Platinum frame, an external
reference (on Sync input 1, 2, or 3) is required by I/O modules, and Sync 4 will
be unavailable as an input. The required reference can come from an AES
DARS input or can be derived from a video input.
Each of the four sync signals presented to the PT-CBP BNC connectors is routed
to the front-loading PT-SYNC modules, which provide for buffering and pulse
detection of the four channels. Card-edge LEDs indicate the presence of sync. If
no video sync signal is detected in Channel 1, in its place the PT-SYNC module
automatically distributes the internal trigger signal from the PT-RES module.
Each of the 4 selected sync signals is presented to separate distribution trees,
responsible for distributing the sync signals to as many as 8 banks of modules,
each containing up to 16 I/O modules. If TDM is present in a 9RU, 15RU, or

28RU Platinum router, a PT-SYNC module is required to distribute

synchronizing information. Sync 4 will be unavailable for external inputs and
will be used for internal synchronization. In addition, an AES reference is
required to synchronize the TDM I/O modules. This reference can be a DAR
signal or derived from a video input.
Using both a Slot ID scheme and Inhibit signal, the PT-SYNC module is able to
establish a primary/secondary redundancy with a second module. Upon failure
of the primary module, it tri-states its outputs and passes functionality to the
secondary module.
Additional card-edge LEDs include the following:
that power is present on the module and that the +24 V power rails are
operational.
• The LED labelled “ACT CTRL” is the control system acknowledgment.
The LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then
turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is
communicating with the module. It flashes green if there is an alarm
condition on this module.
• The LED labelled “ACT CARD” indicates that the PT-SYNC module is in
the primary mode and actively distributing the sync signals. (In certain
failure modes, the module will still distribute sync signal even if the
ACT-CARD LED is not lit on either module.
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the
front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
All Platinum frames support redundant sync distribution modules. Since the
PT-SYNC can operate in a redundant configuration, it has the capability of
“tristating” the sync outputs when the redundant card is present, and to
seamlessly switch over when the redundant card fails or is removed.
Table 2-10 shows the sync reference types and default switch points supported
by Platinum.
Table 2-10. Sync Reference Types and Default Switch Points

Sync Reference Type Default Switch Point
Analog 525/60 Line 10
Analog 525/60 / 1.001 Line 10
Analog 625/50 Line 6
1920×1080/60I Line 7
1920×1080/60I / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/50I Line 7
1920×1080/30P Line 7
1920×1080/30P / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/25P Line 7

Table 2-10. Sync Reference Types and Default Switch Points

Sync Reference Type Default Switch Point
1920×1080/24P Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
1920×1080/24P / 1.001 Line 7
1920×1080/24PsF / 1.001 Line 7
1280×720/60P Line 7
1280×720/60P / 1.001 Line 7
1280×720/50P Line 7
Reporting
Each of the four sync channels will provide reporting of signal presence using a
LED for each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control
system. As well, four additional LEDs will indicate the following:
• Internal / external sync
• Power supply indicator (all power rails are operational)
• Control system acknowledgment (control system is communicating with the
module)
• Active module (output is “in use” or “on-air”)
Control Requirements
The PT-SYNC module uses the Leitch DA core control system for cost-effective
basic functionality, which adheres to the Platinum Slot ID and PIPE control
schemes. All settings for the redundancy circuitry are reset to a default
configuration on module insertion.
Installation
All sync modules are installed at the Leitch manufacturing facility. See
“Installing Sync Modules” on page 256 for the procedure for field expansion of
sync modules. If you need to order additional components, please contact your
Leitch dealer or the Leitch Sales Department.
Configuration

The PT-SYNC Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are
enabled and/or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters
Table 2-11. PT-SYNC Parameters List


Distribution Enable_1 Determines how sync is distributed • Raw
• through the Platinum router • Derived
• • Disable
Distribution Enable_4
Reference Lock_1 Signifies sync lock on PT-SYNC • No
• inputs • Yes
•
Reference Lock_4
AES Data Rate_1 Displays AES Ref data rate (if any) • Unknown
• connected to PT-SYNC inputs • 192 kHz
• • 96 kHz
AES Data Rate_4 • 88 kHz
• 48 kHz
• 44 kHz
• 32 kHz
• TDM sync pulse
Module ID Displays unique module identifier of String
PT-SYNC
1

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 2-14. PT-SYNC Module Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 2-12. PT-SYNC Coaxial Inputs

Item Specification
Number of inputs 4
Output type Unbalanced
Band width Up to 50 MHz
Input connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance Hi-Z, looping
Signal type AES (DARS), analog black/burst, HD tri-level
sync
Input amplitude 1.0 to 4.0Vp-p ± 10% into 75Ω load

PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module

Operation
Figure 2-15. PT-SYNC-MI Module Interconnect
The PT-SYNC-MI module interconnect provides the interface between the

PT-SYNC modules and the central signal distribution module for the Platinum
frame (PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 module interconnect). It is located behind
the PT-SYNC, and interconnects these modules with the MI module.
Installation
All PT-SYNC-MI modules are installed at our manufacturing facility.
Configuration


Chapter 3
Input Modules
Overview
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed
descriptions of the input modules available for the Platinum router. A General
Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum input module
operates. Each input module is further described in terms of its individual
operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block
diagram, and specifications. Where appropriate, a module’s corresponding back
panel I/O module is identified.
This chapter covers the following modules:
• “Input Module General Description” on page 66
• “PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules” on page 110
• “PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM
Capability” on page 120
• “PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules
PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules” on page 87
• “PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM
Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with
TDM Capability” on page 94
• “PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules”
on page 103
• “PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Receiver” on page
132
• “PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules” on page 69
• “PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules” on page 73
• “PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules” on page 78
• “PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules” on page 82

Input Module General Description

Signal Input Connectors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Card-edge
connector
Power Control
Power
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VL
+24V
GND
+5V
?V
?V
?V
?V
?V
Test points
System Signal Presence
ACTCTRL
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
POWER
Handle cutout
ACTIN
System Signal
LEDs Presence
LEDs
Figure 3-1. Typical Platinum Input Module
The hot-swappable Platinum input module contains 8 video input or 16 audio

input channels, each of which are recovered and distributed to the crosspoint
matrix module or audio TDM module.
There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
that +24V is present on the module.

• The yellow LED labelled “ACTIN” is the input usage warning. It shows
that the controller has recognized that there is an input on this module being
used by an output.
• The LED labelled “ACTCTRL” is the control system acknowledgment. The
LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8” (or to “Input
16” on an audio module), are located in a row on the front of the input module.
Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding
input. There are test points near the front edge of the module for power supply
voltages and GND.
Each input module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a frame while a
frame is powered and functioning. The system controller will recognize the
addition or removal of an input module from any of the input module slots, and
will update the change automatically. When the controller recognizes the
addition of an input module, it will allow the user to control the additional
inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the frame, each input module mates with a passive connector
assembly (back module), which is mounted in the rear of the frame. This
assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the
input module, without requiring any active components. Frames that are not
fully populated with input modules when shipped from the factory contain
blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an input module is added to the
frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding
back module.
Each input module provides signal presence indication via card edge LEDs and
the control software, both of which have the ability to be disabled or enabled
through the control software, along with a user-selectable hysteresis period.
Control Requirements
All settings for the input circuitry are reset to the input slot’s configuration on
module insertion. Settings follow module location, not modules themselves.
This way, modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to
reconfigure the input parameters.
Applications Integration
The CCS Control System supports each input module via the Navigator
architecture with the router module installed, and is available for control and
monitoring from any Harris- or SNMP-supported control application.

Controllable Parameters List

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the
available parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled
and/or changed via RouterMapper’s Configure Module Parameters and/or
Module Parameters list box1. Follow the appropriate steps (as described in the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide) to open the list box, and
then change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked
with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Input module parameters lists are
provided on the following pages:
Table 3-1. Input Modules’ User-Controllable Parameters Lists

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules Page 114
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with Page 124
TDM Capability
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules Page 89
PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules Page 96
with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES
Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Page 106
Modules
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Receiver page 134
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 70
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules page 73
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules Page 79
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules page 83
1

PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-2. PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Digital Multirate Input Modules
Note
PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series
modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
The PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB digital multirate input module receives any

AC-coupled bilevel digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3
Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s terminated with 75Ω. The module automatically compensates
the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized
output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a
module edge connector.
If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is
longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed
to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Modules

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB and the
PT-HS-IB modules.
Installation
Input Module Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Installing
Input and Output Modules” on page 246 for the procedure for field expansion of
input modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact
your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See
“Installing Back Panel Modules” on page 258 for the procedure for field
expansion of back panel modules. If you need to purchase additional
components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
This module requires no additional configuration procedures besides those
described for frame configuration.
Table 3-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB and
PT-HS-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. See your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for information on how to
set these parameters.
Table 3-2. PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB User-Controllable Parameters List


Signal Presence_1 [RO] Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
• signal • Signal present
•
Signal Presence_8 [RO]
Bypass_1 Sets the EQ mode • EQ bypass
• • Equalized
•
Bypass_8
Cable Length Adjust_1 Sets the equalization cable length (for • Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or
• data rate not higher than 360 Mb/s) equivalent
• • Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A
Cable Length Adjust_8 or equivalent
• Short: 50 to 100 m Belden 1694A
or equivalent
require it


IN1
OUT1A
EQ 1×2
OUT1B
IN2
OUT2A
EQ 1×2
OUT2B
IN3
OUT3A
EQ 1×2
OUT3B
IN4
OUT4A
EQ 1×2
OUT4B Power-up
IN5 Micro-
System control
OUT5A processor
EQ 1×2
OUT5B
IN6
OUT6A
EQ 1×2 Signal
OUT6B presence
IN7 FPGA
OUT7A Bypass & System control
EQ 1×2 MCL D/A
OUT7B ADJ
IN8
OUT8A +3.3V +24V
EQ 1×2 Power
OUT8B supply
Figure 3-3. PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 3-3. PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Serial Video Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M,
DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals,
3Mb/s to 1.5Gb/s
Maximum input amplitude 880 mV
Nominal input amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
Return loss > 16 dB, up to 1.5 GHz
Equalization Automatic
270 Mb/s data rate 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s data rate 492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A

PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input

Modules
Operation
Figure 3-4. PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Digital Multirate Input Modules
Note
The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any

AC-coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to
2.97 Gb/s terminated with 75Ω. The module automatically compensates the
cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized
output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a
module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the
limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the output of the
equalizer will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module. The equalizer
function may be bypassed if EQ is not desired.
The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional
submodules.
Back Panel I/O Modules

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB+ and the
PT-HS-IB+ modules.

Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Special
Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint
Module Firmware” on page 241 and “Installing Input and Output Modules” on
page 246 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If you need to
Department.

Configuration

Table 3-4 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB and
PT-HS-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 3-4. PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List


•
• • Equalized
•
Bypass_8
Mute_1 Mutes the output of the board • Normal operation
• • Output of board is muted
•
Mute_8
• • Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A
or equivalent
Proc Enable Enables signal processing (if • No signal processing
submodule is present) • Signal processing enabled
Pre-Emphasis_1 Sets the output pre-emphasis control • 0 dB

• for the onboard switchers • 3 dB
• • 6 dB
Pre-Emphasis_16 • 9 dB
Receiver EQ_1 Sets the receiver equalization for • 12 dB

• onboard switchers • 5 dB
•
Receiver EQ_5
require it
Module ID Displays module identifier of String
PM-HS-IB+ or PT-HS-IB+ module


Equalizer Fanout
4×4 crosspoint
HD/SD HD/SD output 1A

input 1 HD/SD output 1B
Feedback
from PT-XP
Equalizer Fanout 4×2 crosspoint

HD/SD output 2A
HD/SD
input 2
HD/SD output 2B

HD/SD output 3A
HD/SD
input 3
HD/SD output 3B
•
Optional
processing
submodule
•
• •
• Equalizer Fanout 2×2 crosspoint
•
HD/SD output 8A
HD/SD
input 8
HD/SD output 8B
TDM output
Sync
inputs IB2IB
Ethernet
EQ 1-8 cable
length adjust
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V +3.3 V
+24 VA D/A converters

Power conversion and
+24 VB voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA EQ 1-8 bypass/mute
EQ 1-8 signal detect
SLID
PIPE CPLD
Figure 3-5. PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 3-5. PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Serial Video Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE
344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals,
3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
> 10 dB, 1.485 GHz to 2.97 GHz

PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-6. PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Input Module
Note
modules operate in PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU frames.
The PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB digital multirate input module receives any AC coupled

digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s
terminated with 75Ω. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if
the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split
into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge
connector.
If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is
longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed
to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Module

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB
modules.
Installation


Configuration
Table 3-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB
modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper Configure
Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. See your
Table 3-6. PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List


•
• • Equalized
•
Bypass_8
• • Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A
or equivalent
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps


IN1
OUT1A
EQ 1×2
OUT1B
IN2
OUT2A
EQ 1×2
OUT2B
IN3
OUT3A
EQ 1×2
OUT3B
IN4
OUT4A
EQ 1×2
OUT4B Power-up
IN5 Micro-
System control
OUT5A processor
EQ 1×2
OUT5B
IN6
OUT6A
EQ 1×2 Signal
OUT6B presence
IN7 FPGA
OUT7A Bypass & System control
EQ 1×2 MCL D/A
OUT7B ADJ
IN8
OUT8A +3.3V +24V
EQ 1×2 Power
OUT8B supply
Figure 3-7. PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 3-7. PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Serial Video Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s
to 540 Mb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800mV ± 10%
Return loss > 16 dB, up to 540 MHz

PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-8. PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Input Module
Note
The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any AC

coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540
Mb/s terminated with 75Ω. The module automatically compensates the cable
loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is
split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge
connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e.,
the cable is longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data
will be fed to the MI module.
The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional
submodules.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB+ and
PT-S-IB+ modules.
Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Special
page 246 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If you need to
Department.

Configuration
Table 3-8 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+
Table 3-8. PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List


•
• • Equalized
•
Bypass_8
Mute_1 Mutes the output of the board • Normal operation
• • Output of board is muted
•
Mute_8
• • Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A
or equivalent

Table 3-8. PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Proc Enable Enables signal processing (if • No signal processing
submodule is present) • Signal processing enabled
Pre-Emphasis_1 Sets the output pre-emphasis control • 0 dB

• for the onboard switchers • 3 dB
• • 6 dB
Pre-Emphasis_16 • 9 dB
Receiver EQ_1 Sets the receiver equalization for • 12 dB

• onboard switchers • 5 dB
•
Receiver EQ_5
require it
Module ID Displays module identifier of String
PM-S-IB+ or PT-S-IB+ module


Equalizer Fanout
4×4 crosspoint
SD output 1A
SD input 1
SD output 1B
Feedback
from PT-XP

SD output 2A
SD input 2
SD output 2B

SD output 3A
SD input 3
SD output 3B
•
Optional
processing
submodule
•
• •
• Equalizer Fanout 2×2 crosspoint
•
SD output 8A
SD input 8
SD output 8B
TDM output
Sync
inputs IB2IB
Ethernet
EQ 1-8 cable
length adjust
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V +3.3 V
+24 VA D/A converters

+24 VB voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA EQ 1-8 bypass/mute
EQ 1-8 signal detect
SLID
PIPE CPLD
Figure 3-9. PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Functional Block Diagram

Specifications
Table 3-9. PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Serial Video Input Specifications

Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
to 540 Mb/s
Nominal input amplitude 800mV ± 10%

PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input

Modules
PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-10. PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Input Module (Shown with Connector Module)
Figure 3-11. PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Input Module (Shown with Connector Module)
Note

The AES input front module receives any AC-coupled digital signal with
amplitude not exceeding 2V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75Ω with
the coaxial back module installed, and any digital signal with amplitude not
exceeding 7V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110Ω with the balanced
back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the
signal before distributing it to the crosspoint matrix. It allows for the connection
of 8 channels of AES digital audio. Each of the inputs is presented to separate
input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion
to balanced Low Voltage Differential Signals (LVDS) for use in the
FPGA-based signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry.
Figure 3-13 on page 90 shows the functional block diagram for the AES input
module.The AES input module supports connection of 8 AES channels and
performs basic signal presence detection. The optional 16-channel version
includes the time division multiplexed (TDM) AES routing scheme (see
page 94).

The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-IB and
PT-AEB-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module
corresponds to the PM-AEC-IB and PT-AEC-IB input modules. DB-25
connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O
modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be
used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 3-12. PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation


Configuration
Table 3-10 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-IB,
PT-AEB-IB, PM-AEC-IB, and PT-AEC-IB modules. These parameters are
accessible via the RouterMapper Configure Module Parameters and/or Module
Parameters list boxes. See your RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference
Guide for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 3-10. PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB/PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List


Signal Presence 1 [RO] Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
•
Signal Presence 8 [RO]
require it
Bypass_1 Bypass Platinum auto crosspoint mute • Off
• if signal is not present • On
•
Bypass_8
Back Module Type Displays back module type connected • PT-AEBT-BMI
to PM-AEB-IB, PT-AEB-IB, • PT-AECT-BMI
PM-AEC-IB, or PT-AEC-IB module • PT-AEB-BMI
• PT-AEC-BMI

Figure 3-13. PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB and PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Functional Block Diagram

Pinout Diagram
Table 3-11. PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
J2 (Inputs 1 – 8) DB-25 Pin No.

1+ 13
1- 12
1 Ground 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Ground 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Ground 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Ground 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Ground 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Ground 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Ground 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1

Specifications
AES Balanced Digital Audio
Table 3-12. PM-AEB-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital

Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced, transformer coupled
Input connector DB-25
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3
AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital
signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Input amplitude 0.2 Vpp – 7 Vp-p
Nominal input amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V
Table 3-13. PT-AEB-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio
Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3

AES Coaxial Digital Audio

Table 3-14. PM-AEC-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type AC coupled
Input connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter)
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Input amplitude 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p
Nominal input amplitude 1.0Vp-p ± 10%
Return loss > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Table 3-15. PT-AEC-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω

PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input

PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input
Operation
Figure 3-14. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Input Modules
Figure 3-15. PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Input Modules

Note
The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with
amplitude not exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75Ω with
the coaxial back module installed, with amplitude not exceeding 7 V from
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110Ω with the balanced back module
installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the signal before
distributing it to the router’s matrices. This module provides a TDM version of
all input signals to be distributed to the audio-specific crosspoint module or,
optionally, it can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint. It
allows for the connection of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a
balanced or unbalanced coaxial back module, routed within the Platinum
platform. Using the optional 8- or 16-channel 110Ω balanced back module
(PT-AEB-IBP), or 8- or 16-channel 75Ω coaxial unbalanced back module
(PT-AEC-IBP), the AES input front module with TDM will accept up to 16
AES digital audio signals. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input
buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to
balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGA-based
signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry. Figure 3-17 on
page 98 shows the functional block diagram for the AES input front module
with TDM.

The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-IB and
PT-AEBT-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module
corresponds to the PM-AECT-IB and PT-AECT-IB input modules. DB-25
connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O
used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.

Installation

TAll back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See
Configuration
Table 3-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-IB,
PT-AEBT-IB, PM-AECT-IB, and PT-AECT-IB modules. These parameters are
Table 3-16. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable

Parameters List

•
Phase Alarm_1 [RO] Alarm set if left and right channels are • No phase error
• out of phase • Phase error
•
Phase Alarm_16 [RO]
Polarity Reversal_1 Reverses + and - to correct audio • Normal polarity
• polarity in the analog domain • Invert polarity
•
Polarity Reversal_32
Tone_1 Indicates type of tone to send out AES • Pass input
• output • Silence
• • 500 Hz
Tone_16 • 1K

Table 3-16. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable

Parameters List (Continued)
Swap/Copy_1 Swap/Copy left and right audio • No swap
• channels • Swap left and right
• • Copy left to right
Swap/Copy_16 • Copy right to left
Audio Level Adjustment_1 Indicates gain/attenuation applied to 10 dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments

• mono channel
•
Audio Level Adjustment_32
Clipping Detect_1 [RO] Reports if signal on the input exceeds • Signal OK
• the maximum input amplitude • Signal clipping
•
Clipping Detect_32 [RO]
Summing_1 Add left and right audio samples, • No summing
• divide by 2 • Right to left
• • Left to right
Summing_16 • Both
Bypass_1 For signals routed to wideband xpt • No bypass

• only - tells control to make switch • Ignore signal presence
• regardless of signal presence
Bypass_16
Audio Delay_1 Delays the audio signal (in ms) 0 ms to 60 ms
•
•
Audio Delay_16
Src Enable Enables SRC, if licensed • No SRC
• SRC enabled
XPT Type Determines crosspoint matrix • TDM XPT
requirement • Wideband
• Both TDM and wideband
• Undefined
Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for source • Sync 4
• Sync 3
• Sync 2
• Sync 1
require it
Back Module Type Displays the back module type • PT-AEBT-BMI
connected to the PM-AEBT-IB, • PT-AECT-BMI
PT-AEBT-IB, PM-AECT-IB, or • PT-AEB-BMI
PT-AECT-IB module • PT-AEC-BMI

Output 1A
AES input 1
Output 1B
AES input 2 Output 2A
AES input 3 Output 2B
Output 3B
AES input 5
Output 4A
AES input 6 Output 4B First 8 inputs distributed
AES input 7 Output 5A to crosspoint matrix
AES input 8 FPGA-based signal Output 5B

presence detection and Output 6A
AES input 9 internal distribution
Output 6B
AES input 11 Output 7B
Output 8B
AES input 13 All 16 inputs distributed
AES input14 to TDM matrix
AES input 15
TDM output
AES input 16
Internal control bus
+24VA in Card status and

from frame +5V signal presence
+24VB in On-board +3.3V LEDs
from frame supply PIPE
+2.5V Control logic
Back module
+5VL in +1.2V PRTI
ID signals
from frame
Figure 3-17. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Functional Block Diagram

Pinout Diagram
Table 3-17. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

1+ 13
1- 12
1 Ground 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Ground 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Ground 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Ground 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Ground 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Ground 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Ground 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1

Table 3-17. PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information (Continued)

1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

9+ 13
9- 12
9 Ground 25
10+ 24
10- 23
10 Ground 11
11+ 10
11- 9
11 Ground 22
12+ 21
12- 20
12 Ground 8
13+ 7
13- 6
13 Ground 19
14+ 18
14- 17
14 Ground 5
15+ 4
15- 3
15 Ground 16
16+ 15
16- 14
16 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1
Specifications
AES Balanced Digital Audio
Table 3-18. PM-AEBT-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital

Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3
Table 3-19. PT-AEBT-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital

Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3
AES Coaxial Digital Audio

Table 3-20. PM-AECT-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital
Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 75Ω
Table 3-21. PT-AECT-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Impedance 75Ω
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI

Decoder Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-18. PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Module
Note
The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB analog video to SDI decoder input module

converts a block of eight composite NTSC or PAL video signals to high quality,
10-bit serial digital signals (SDI) for routing within the Platinum platform. This
module also may be used for “analog to analog” video routing with the optional
PM-ENC-OB or PT-ENC-OB encoder output module.
Hardware Reporting
Each of the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence
using a card-edge mounted LED1 in each channel for on-site troubleshooting
and via the frame control system. These additional system LEDs are available:
• Power supply indicator
• Control system acknowledgment
• Input usage warning
1 See
page 66 through page 67 for more information about input module LEDs.
Composite Analog Input Processing

The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video
signals terminating into 75Ω BNC connectors. Using the built-in automatic
(AGC) or manual gain settings, the input signal level can be adjusted ±6 dB in
each channel to compensate for variances in upstream equipment. As well, each
input is “back-porch” clamped to the proper blanking level prior to conversion
in the analog to digital converter (ADC) and offers the ability to handle signals
with a luminance pedestal (+7.5 IRE Setup).
Composite Analog to Digital Conversion
Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place, each channel of
video is presented to a 10-bit analog to digital converter, which is phase and
frequency locked by an internal PLL. Considering that the desired conversion is
to component digital on this card, the analog to digital converters are 2X
oversampling at 27MHz (4:2:2 data rate of 13.5MHz times 2). As a benefit of
the 2X oversampling, a half-band decimation filter is applied right after the
digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate, which effectively
adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio (SNR). Although sampled at a
component data rate, the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into
separate luminance and chrominance channels (Y/C). The chrominance channel
is sent through a quadrature demodulator for further separation into the base
component color difference channels (R - Y / B - Y). As the color demodulation
process is likely to cause artifacts in the video, the R - Y and B - Y signals are
sent through low-pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve optimum
bandwidth, and through a five-line adaptive comb filter to compare possible
color phase shift issues from line to line. As the next step in the color
demodulation process, a color space converter is used to convert the red and
blue color components to U and V color difference components (Cr /Cb) as
needed for ITU-R 601i and SMPTE-125M type signals.
The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of
equations:
• Y = 0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B
• U = -0.172R - 0.339G + 0.511B + 512
• V = 0.511R - 0.428G - 0.083B + 512
In cases where the U/V bandwidth needs to be limited, as to prevent aliasing or
chrominance crosstalk, a set of user-adjustable notch filters is provided.
Although more of an issue in the companion encoder / digital to analog (DAC)
cards, careful attention has to be paid to the implementation of these filters as a
tradeoff between frequency response and out of band noise is often encountered.
In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y signal bandwidth, a peaking filter
is available to the user. There are also controls for the user to set the brightness,
contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and hue of the incoming video signal.
Once the chrominance signals have been processed, they are reunited with the
luminance (Y) channel to complete the 10-bit YUV component digital signal.
Component Digital Packaging

The parallel 10-bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the
next process, where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given
the proper start of active video (SAV) and end of active video (EAV) headers for
a SMPTE-125M compliant parallel output signal. Along with the parallel 10-bit
video signal, a 27 MHz clock signal is provided for latching the data words in
the downstream serializer device.
Parallel to Serial Converter
The parallel 10-bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA-based
serializer for conversion to SMPTE-259C serial digital component video at 270
Mb/s. The 10-bit parallel word is latched into the serializer on the rising edge of
the accompanying 27 MHz clock signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate
(270 MB/s). As the serial data is used to clock downstream devices, the serial
signal is scrambled and encoded using a non-return to zero (NRZI) algorithm to
ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or 0s to keep the
receiving PLLs locked.
The NRZI / scramble polynomial is defined as
G1 (X) = X9 + X4 + 1 and G2 (X) = X + 1
The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for
distribution to the crosspoint module(s) within the Platinum frame.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DEC-IB and
PT-DEC-IB modules.
Installation

Configuration
Table 3-22 on page 106 lists the user-controllable parameters for the
PM-DEC-IB and PT-DEC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via the
RouterMapper Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list
boxes. See your RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for
information on how to set these parameters.
Table 3-22. PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List
Signal Presence_1 Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
• input signal • Signal present
•
Signal Presence_8
Chrominance AGC_1 Enables or disables chrominance color • Off
• AGC levels • On
•
Chrominance AGC_8
Luminance AGC_1 Enables or disables luminance video • Off
• AGC levels • On
•
Luminance AGC_8
Video Standard_1 Sets video standard • Auto
• • NTSC
• • PAL
Video Standard_8
Pedestal Enable_1 Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level • Enabled
• • Disabled
•
Pedestal Enable_8
Luminance Filter Type_1 Enables or disables luminance • Luminance adaptive comb filter
• adaptive comb filter type enabled
• • Luminance adaptive comb filter
Luminance Filter Type_8 disabled (use trap filter)
• Both filters disabled
Brightness_1 Sets brightness level 0 - 255 (128)
•
•
Brightness_8
Contrast_1 Sets contrast level 0 - 255 (128)
•
•
Contrast_8
Chrominance Saturation_1 Sets chrominance saturation level 0 - 255 (128)
•
•
Chrominance Saturation_8
Table 3-22. PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)

Chrominance Hue (tint)_1 Sets chrominance hue level –180° to +180° (0°)
•
•
Chrominance Hue (tint)_8
Chrominance Adaptive Comb Filter_1 Enables chrominance adaptive comb • Off
• filter • On
•
Chrominance Adaptive Comb Filter_8
Wideband Chrominance Lowpass Color lowpass filter selection • Off
Filter_1 • On
•
•
Wideband Chrominance Lowpass
Filter_8
Chrominance Notch Filter Select_1 Color notch filter selection • Off
• • Notch 1
• • Notch 2
Chrominance Notch Filter Select_8 • Notch 3
require it
Bypass_1 Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint • Off
• mute if signal is not present • On
•
Bypass_8
Local
I2C
Local
I2C
Bidirectional
frame control ENET Control Card health and
PIPE Logic signal presence LEDs
signals
Power failure
monitoring
+5 V
-5 V
+24VA
Power On-board +3.3 V
from frame supply +2.5 V
+24VB
+1.8 V
+1.5 V
Figure 3-19. PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-23. PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Analog Video to SDI Decoder

Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type NTSC, PAL
Input coupling DC coupled
Maximum input amplitude 2.0 Vpp
Nominal input amplitude 1.0 Vp-p + 10%
Return loss Better than 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Clamping Automatic
Quantization 10 bits
Filter Five line adaptive comb, notch, or trap
Output data rate 270 Mb/s per SMPTE 259C
Frequency response ± 0.1 dB to 5.75 MHz
Differential gain < 1%
Differential phase < 1°
Signal to noise ratio > 65 dB
Bulk delay < 80 μs typically
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-20. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Audio A/D Input Module
Note
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio

to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two
optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600Ω terminated
inputs) provide 8 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum I/O
module features.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio
level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample
data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence
is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively
disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is
maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB can automatically detect an external AES
reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate
AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external
reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of
several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to
adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified
tolerance.
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB provides 8 dual channel balanced analog audio
inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high
impedance inputs; optional 600Ω terminated inputs are also available. Input
signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal
laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The
signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are
then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital
full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion
attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale
settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to
differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a
gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to
the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC
offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling
delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These
converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass
filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are
formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and
CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of
each AES signal are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the
Platinum crosspoints.
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge
mounted LEDs.
• Eight green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8,” are
located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs
illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input.
• Eight red signal clipping LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 8,” are located
in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates
when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 66 through
page 67 for a description of the system LEDs.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB operates in one of three modes: External,
internal, and auto mode:.
• In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an

external AES reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from
the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase
to this external reference.
• In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal
oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the
most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow
adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified
tolerance.
• In auto mode, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB detects whether a usable
external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it
will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost
or becomes unusable, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB will automatically
switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is
restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as
described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection
Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
• The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator
circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude.
This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled
potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The
reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all
inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator
reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time
duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be
overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle
channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the
detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an
associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to
this function.
• The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the
A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale
capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is
illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user
has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADC-IB and
PT-ADC-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The
optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring
of individual signals to the frame.
Figure 3-21. PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Installation

Configuration
Table 3-24 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADC-IB and
PT-ADC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 3-24. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List


•
Clipping Detect 1 [Ro] Reports if signal on the input exceeds • Signal OK
•
Clipping Detect 8 [Ro]
Signal Presence Threshold Sets signal presence threshold for all 0x00 to 0x7F
inputs
0 Dbfs Setting Sets 0 DBFS level • +13 dBu to +28 dBu
• +7 dBm to +22 dBm
Operating Mode Sets PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB • Auto mode
operating mode • Internal mode
• External mode
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Sets the sampling frequency when in • 32 kHz
Select internal mode • 44.1 kHz
• 48 kHz
• 88.2 kHz
• 96k Hz
• 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjusts internal mode sampling 0x00 to 0xFF
Adjust frequency
External Reference Frequency [RO] Reports external reference frequency 32 kHz -192 kHz
require it
Ch. A Presence_1 Reports absence or presence of a • Absent
• signal on Channel A • Present
•
Ch. A Presence_8
Ch. B Presence_1 Reports absence or presence of a • Absent
• signal on Channel B • Present
•
Ch. B Presence_8
Table 3-24. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Ext. Reference Lock Error Reports lock error on external • No
reference • Yes
Ext. Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Validity Error Reports validity error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Confidence Error Reports confidence error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Parity Error Reports parity error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Biphase Error Reports biphase error on external • No

reference • Yes
Bypass_1 Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint • Off

• mute if signal is not present • On
•
Bypass_8
Presence hysteresis Sets hysteresis for signal presence 7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
parameters
Silence Delay_1 Sets the time duration between loss of 100 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
• signal presence and audio muting
•
Silence Delay_16
Silence Disable_1 Disables feature of generating AES • No
• silence when signal is not present • Yes
•
Silence Disable_16

Input Channel 1
Signal
Presence To FPGA
Detection
Receiver A/D Converter 1 FPGA
Attenuator
Analog In 1
Input 1A Serial Data
Vcom12 AES out AES Output 1A
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 1B
0dBFS adjust Buffer, Filter,
Single to DC Bias
Clocks, AES out AES Output 1B
from FPGA control
Diff.
Analog
•
In 3 •
Input Channel 2 Vcom34
Clip Detect
•
Analog In 4 •
Input 2B
•
• •
• AES out AES Output 8A
•
• A/D Converter 4
AES out AES Output 8B
Analog In 1
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 7B
Clocks,
control
Analog
Input 8A In 3
Serial Data
Analog Clip Detect
In 4
Input 8B
Clocks
AES
Sync Inputs Sync Select Reference
Receiver I2C
Clocks
VCXOs
Control
+24VA
Power Conversion
+24VB and
+5VL Voltage Monitoring
Thor Core Control
SLID
PIPE
PRTI PRTI
Figure 3-22. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-25. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Pinout Information
Inputs 1 – 4 DB-44 Pin No. Inputs 5 – 8 DB-44 Pin No.

1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1A Ground 44 5A, 6A Ground 22
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
1B Ground 42 5B Ground 35
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Ground 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A Ground 20
2B Ground 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Ground 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Ground 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
3B Ground, 4A Ground 25 8A- 2
4A+ 10 8A, 8B Ground 18
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Ground 37
Specifications
Table 3-26. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital

Audio Input – Standard Version
Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced
Impedance > 20kΩ
Signal type Stereo analog audio
Maximum input amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
CMRR > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
Conversion type 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
Sampling rates 32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
Gain stability ± 0.01 dB
Frequency response ± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Idle channel noise < –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
Crosstalk > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all
hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 3-27. PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital

Audio Input – 600Ω Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Input type Balanced
Impedance 600Ω
Maximum input amplitude +22 dBm
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in
CMRR > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
hostile
–1dBFS = +17dBm)
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input

Operation
Figure 3-23. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Audio A/D Input Module
Note
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB audio A/D input module provides analog

audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two
optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600Ω terminated
inputs) provide 16 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum I/O
module features. This option will provide the user higher conversion capacity
(16 stereo channels), made available via Harris’s TDM (Time Division
Multiplexing) architecture.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio
level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample
data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence
is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively
disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is
maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB can automatically detect an external AES

reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate
AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external
reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of
several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to
adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified
tolerance.
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog
audio inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high
impedance inputs; optional 600Ω terminated inputs are also available. Input
signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal
laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The
signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are
then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital
full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion
attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale
settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to
differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a
gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to
the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC
offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling
delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These
converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass
filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are
formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and
CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of
the first eight AES signals are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to
the wideband Platinum crosspoints. The FPGA also provides a TDM version of
all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio-specific crosspoint
module(s).
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge
mounted LEDs.
• The green signal presence LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 16,” are
located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs
illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input.
• The red signal clipping LEDs, labeled “Input 1” to “Input 16,” are located in
a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates
when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level
adjust available through TDM scales the digital signal beyond AES limits.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 66 through
page 67 for a description of the system LEDs.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operates in one of three modes: External,
internal, and auto mode:.
• In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an
external AES reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from
the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase
to this external reference.
• In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal
oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the
most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow
adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified
tolerance.
• In auto mode, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB detects whether a usable
external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it
will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost
or becomes unusable, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB will automatically
switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is
restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as
described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection
Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
• The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator
circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude.
This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled
potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The
reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all
inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator
reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time
duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be
overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle
channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the
detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an
associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to
this function.
• The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the

A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale
capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is
illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user
has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADCT-IB and
PT-ADCT-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The
Installation

Configuration
Table 3-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADCT-IB and
PT-ADCT-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 3-28. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List


• signal (determined by signal presence • Signal present
• threshold, signal absence before mute,
Signal Presence_16 [RO] signal presence before mute release,
and tone generation)
Threshold_1 Sets signal presence threshold (all 0x00 to 0x7F
• inputs)
•
Threshold_8
Silence Delay_1 Sets the time duration between loss of 7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
• signal presence and audio muting
•
Silence Delay_16
Presence Hysteresis_1 Sets the time duration between 7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
• acquisition of signal presence and
• release of audio muting
Presence Hysteresis_16
Phase Alarm_1 [RO] Alarm set if left and right channels are • No phase error
•
Phase Alarm_16 [RO]
•
Tone Indicates type of tone to send out AES • Pass input
output • Silence
• 500Hz
• 1K
Table 3-28. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Audio Level Adjustment_1 Indicates gain/attenuation applied to 10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments
• mono channel
•
•
Bypass_1 For signals routed to wideband • No bypass
• crosspoint only - tells control to make • Ignore signal presence
• switch regardless of signal presence
Bypass_16
Xpt Type Determines crosspoint matrix • TDM XPT
• Both TDM and wideband
• Undefined
0 dBFS setting Sets 0 DBFS level • +13 dBu to +28 dBu
• +7 dBm to +22 dBm
Operating Mode Sets PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB • Auto mode
operating mode • Internal mode
• External mode
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Sets the sampling frequency when in • 32 kHz
Select internal mode • 44.1 kHz
• 48 kHz
• 88.2 kHz
• 96k Hz
• 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjusts internal mode sampling 0x00 to 0xFF
Adjust frequency
External Reference Frequency [RO] Reports external reference frequency 32 kHz - 192 kHz
• Sync 3
• Sync 2
• Sync 1
require it
Table 3-28. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Ch. A Presence_1 Reports absence or presence of a • Absent
• signal on Channel A • Present
•
Ch. A Presence_16
Ch. B Presence_1 Reports absence or presence of a • Absent
• signal on Channel B • Present
•
Ch. B Presence_16
Ext. Reference Lock Error Reports lock error on external • No
reference • Yes
Ext. Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Validity Error Reports validity error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Confidence Error Reports confidence error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Parity Error Reports parity error on external • No

reference • Yes
Ext. Reference Biphase Error Reports biphase error on external • No

reference • Yes
Summing_1 Add left and right audio samples, and • No summing

• then divide by 2 • Right to left
Summing_16 • Both
Silence Disable_1 Disables feature of generating AES • No

• silence when signal is not present • Yes
• (wideband mode only)
Silence Disable_8

Input Channel 1
Signal
Presence To FPGA
Detection
Receiver A/D Converter 1 FPGA
Attenuator
Analog In 1
Vcom12 AES out AES Output 1A
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 1B
0dBFS adjust Buffer, Filter,
Single to DC Bias
Clocks, AES out AES Output 1B
from FPGA control
Diff.
Analog
•
In 3 •
Clip Detect
•
Analog In 4 •
Input 2B
•
• •
•
• AES out AES Output 8A
•
•
•
• A/D Converter 8
AES out AES Output 8B
Analog In 1
Analog Clip Detect
In 2
Input 7B
Clocks,
control
Analog
Input 8A In 3
Serial Data
Analog Clip Detect
In 4
Input 8B
TDM Output
Clocks
AES
Sync Inputs Sync Select Reference
Receiver I2C
Clocks
VCXOs
Control
+24VA
Power Conversion
+24VB and
+5VL Voltage Monitoring
Thor Core Control
SLID
PIPE
PRTI PRTI
Figure 3-25. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-29. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information

1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Ground 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A Ground 20
2B Ground 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Ground 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Ground 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
4A+ 10 8A, 8B Ground 18
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Ground 37
Table 3-29. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information (Continued)

9A+ 15 13A+ 8
9A- 30 13A- 7
9B+ 43 13B+ 36
9B- 28 13B- 21
10A+ 14 14A+ 6
10A- 13 14A- 5
10A Ground 29 14B+ 34
10B+ 41 14B- 19
10B- 26 14B, 15A Ground 20
10B Ground 40 15A+ 4
11A+ 12 15A- 3
11A- 11 15B+ 32
11A Ground 27 15B- 17
11B+ 24 15B Ground 33
11B- 39 16A+ 1
12A+ 10 16A, 16B Ground 18
12A- 9 16B+ 31
12B+ 23 16B- 16
12B- 38
12B Ground 37
Specifications
Table 3-30. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital

Audio Input – Standard Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Input type Balanced
Impedance > 20kΩ
Maximum input amplitude +28 dBu
CMRR > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
hostile
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 3-31. PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital

Audio Input – 600Ω Version
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Input type Balanced
Impedance 600Ω
Maximum input amplitude +22 dBm
CMRR > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
Resolution 24 bits
reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96
Linearity deviation < ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
hostile
–1dBFS = +17dBm)
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video

Receiver
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 3-26. PT-HS1310S-IB Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Receiver

(PT-FO-BMI Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
The PT-HS1310S-IB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video receiver module.

These modules have eight fiber optical receiver receptacles mounted on the
metal back panel of the back module. Each receptacle contains an ST connector,
a PIN type photodiode, and a transimpedance amplifier. The receptacle receives
light modulated by digital video data in the range of 1100 nm–1650 nm, and
converts it to an electrical signal via the internal PIN. An internal
transimpedance amplifier amplifies this electrical signal to obtain the required
amplitude for the following processing stage. The following stage consists of a
limiting amplifier, which enlarges the electrical data to an 800 mV differential
signal and feeds it to the front module.
The front module receives eight-channel data through the module edge
connector. Each channel is equipped with a 2×2 CML crosspoint switch, which
is configured to 1×2.The outputs of this CML are sent out to PT-MI AND PT-XP
for switching. If the input of this 1×2 selects a data from system FB (via an
optional 1-8 buffer), the CML outputs to the module interconnect and crosspoint
modules could be used for system test and diagnosis purpose.
The output stage of this switch also provides a function of pre-emphasis.This
function precompensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data, to
reduce ISI jitter. The limiting amplifier in each channel of the back module
provides an input data loss report.It is used to drive LEDs on the front edge of
the front module.
An FPGA provides control and communication required. Except for common

functions (such as pipe line port, PRTI port, slot ID, power start trigger) this
FPGA also control pre-emphasis amount for each output, normal/diagnosis
selecting and data loss reporting, back module identification.

The PT-FO-BMI back module corresponds to the PT-HS1310S-IB modules.
Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Specialized
Installation and Removal Procedures for Fiber Optical Modules” on page 250
for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of PT-HS1310S-IB
modules.(Also, see Appendix B: “Laser Safety Guidelines” on page 299, for
more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components,
please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

expansion of back panel modules. If you need to order additional components,
Configuration
Table 3-32 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HS1310S-IB modules.
These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper Configure Module
Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. See your RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for information on how to set these
parameters.
Table 3-32. PT-HS1310S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List

[RO] = Read only parameter
Signal presence detect [RO] Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
signal • Signal present
Bypass_1 Enables or disables the reclock bypass • No bypass

• function • Ignore signal presence
•
Bypass_8
PreEmphasis Precompensates the transmission line • 0%
loss for high-speed data • 25%
• 50%
• 100%
Board Level Hysteresis Represents hysteresis for all 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
parameters that require it
Figure 3-27. PT-HS1310S-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 3-33. PT-HS1310S-IB Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Receiver

Input Specifications
Item Specification
Connector ST
Mode Multimode (62.5μm)
Detector PIN
Wavelength 1100 – 1650 nm
Max. input power > –7.5 dBm
Min. input power < –2 0dBm for HD
(sensitivity) < –25 dBm for SD
Damage threshold +1 dBm
Return loss 20 dB
Bit error ratio 10E-12
Chapter 4
Output Modules
Overview
descriptions of the output modules available for the Platinum router. A General
Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum output module
operates. Each output module is further described in terms of its individual
operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block
diagram, and specifications. Where appropriate, a module’s corresponding
output monitoring and back panel I/O modules are identified. This chapter
covers the following modules:
• “Output Module General Description” on page 138
• “PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules” on page 164
• “PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules” on page 164
• “PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM
• “PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM
• “PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output
Modules” on page 188
• “PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output
Modules with TDM Capability” on page 195
• “PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules” on
page 181
• “PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules
with Dual Output” on page 181
• “PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Transmitter” on
page 204
• “PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB: HD-SD with Reclocking and Dual Output
• “PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SD with Reclocking Output Modules” on
page 142
• “PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SD with Reclocking Output Modules”
on page 148
• “PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking and Dual Output

• “PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD with Reclocking Output Modules” on page
154
• “PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD with Reclocking Output Modules” on page
159
Output Module General Description

Signal output connectors
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Card-edge
connector
Control Power
Power
+3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
+5VL
GND
+5V
?V
?V
?V
?V
?V
Test points
System Signal Presence
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 8
ACT CTRL
ACT OUT
POWER
Handle cutout
System Signal
LEDs Presence
LEDs
Figure 4-1. Typical Platinum Output Module
An output module accepts 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix. A secondary

switching circuit then selects 8 of these 32 signals to be driven out of the output
module. Each output channel also contains an output monitoring path which
feeds the output signal seen on any channel back to the crosspoint matrix for
output monitoring. The output monitoring signal is then fed to an optional
rear-mounted output monitoring card. The output monitoring matrix is
controlled though the system controller. The TDM matrix allows an audio
output module to drive 16 outputs.
• The yellow LED labelled “ACT OUT” is the active output warning. It
shows that an active input signal is being switched to this output module.
The green LEDs located on the front of the card, one for each output, indicate its
associated output has a valid signal present. One small red LED located on top
of the PCB is illuminated briefly during power up (or module insertion into a
powered frame), and indicates that configuration of the control interface FPGA
is in process.
On PM-FO-OB and PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, channel status LEDs are
bicolor (green and red). See Table 4-30 on page 205 for descriptions.
Test points for power and GND are located near the front edge of the card.
There are no user-settable switches or controls on this module. All settings for
this module are set through the system controller.
Controllable Parameters Lists

with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Output module parameters lists are
provided on the following pages:
Table 4-1. Output Module Parameters Lists

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules Page 167
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Page 174
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules Page 174
with TDM Capability
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules Page 167
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Page 190
Output Modules
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Page 197
Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Page 184
Modules
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Page 184
Modules with Dual Output
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video page 205
Transmitter
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SD with Reclocking Output Page 144
Modules
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SD with Reclocking page 148
Output Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB: HD-SD with Reclocking and Page 144
Dual Output Modules
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD with Reclocking Output Modules Page 156
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD with Reclocking Output page 160
Modules
PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking and Dual Page 156
Output Modules
1
Signal Flow Diagram
SD/HD × 8
PRTI (4) AutoManual × 8
Bypass × 8
FPGA AutoBypass × 8
SS[2..0] × 8
Lock Detect × 8
Reclockers × 8
Select
8 outputs XPT Card 1
8 outputs
MI connector

OM select
8 outputs
Cable drivers
×8
1 output (OM) 8:1 mux
PIPE (2)
I/O micro ASI/177
ENET
Figure 4-2. Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Module (Showing Reclocking)
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SD with Reclocking

Output Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB: HD-SD with
Reclocking and Dual Output Modules
Operation
Figure 4-3. PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB Output Module
Figure 4-4. PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB Output Module
Note
The HD-SD digital multirate output module comes in these variations:

• The PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB are HD-SD output modules with
reclocking.
• The PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HSR-DOB are HD-SD output modules with
reclocking and dual outputs. They are functionally identical to the
PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB; however, the PM-HSR-DOB and
PT-HSR-DOB have two outputs for each channel and each
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB module occupies two slots.
The PT-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-DOB digital multirate output module receives 32
digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix,
provides secondary switching, reclocks the SMPTE and ASI signals, and sends
them to the drivers designed to drive 75Ω loads. It supports any digital signal
between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s, with reclocking for standard SMPTE data rates in
this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual,
bypass, and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-2. An 8×1 differential
crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Table 4-2. Reclocker Operating Modes

Mode Name Description Note
Automatic The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the received Default
data rate is one of 143 Mb/s, 270 Mb/s, 360 Mb/s, 540 Mb/s and 1.485 Gb/s. If this
reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated and
the reclocked rate is reported.
143 Mb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 143 Mb/s only. If this Manual mode
reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated.
1.485 Gb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.485 Gb/s only. If this Manual mode
Automatic bypass If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the reclocker Default
without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off.
Forced bypass The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output of the —
reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The corresponding signal
presence LED is turned off.
Automatic mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the corresponding Default
input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The corresponding signal
presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if necessary.)
Forced mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch —
setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB,
PM-HSR-DOB, PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HSR-DOB modules.
Output Monitoring Module

The optional PT-HSR-OM module provides output monitoring for the
PM-HSR-OB, PM-HSR-DOB, PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HSR-DOB modules.
Installation
Output Module Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Installing
Input and Output Modules” on page 246 for the procedure for field expansion or
replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components,

Output Monitoring Module Installation

All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See
“Installing Output Monitoring Modules” on page 256 for the procedure for field
expansion of output monitoring modules. If you need to purchase additional
Configuration
Table 4-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB and
PT-HSR-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 4-3. PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB User-Controllable Parameters List


Lock Detect_1 [RO] Reports if data is re-locked by • Not locked
• reclocking stage • Locked
•
Lock Detect_8 [RO]
Mute_1 Sets mute for any data passing • Muted
• reclocking stage • Unmuted
•
Mute_8
Reclocker Mode_1 Sets the reclock mode to manual or • Manual
• automatic • Auto
•
Reclocker Mode_8
Autobypass_1 Enables or disables the reclock • Off
• automatic bypass function • On
•
Autobypass_8
Bypass_1 Sets bypass for reclocking function • Off
• • On
•
Bypass_8
Data Rate_1 Sets the reclock rate • 143
• • 177
• • 270
Data Rate_8 • 360
• 540
• 1483.5/1485
require it
Signal Type_1 Determines slew rate of incoming • SD
• signal • HD
•
Signal Type_8
Sync Type Selects which physical sync port the • Sync1
module uses as a reference • Sync2
• Sync3
• Sync4

IN1A OUT1
IN1B
IN1C Reclocker Driver
IN1D
IN2A OUT2
IN2B
IN2D
IN3A OUT3
IN3B
Reclocker Driver
IN3C
IN3D
IN4A OUT4
IN4B
Reclocker Driver
IN4C
IN4D
IN5A OUT5 Monitoring M-OUT

IN5B Switch
IN5D
IN6A OUT6
IN6B Driver rate
IN6C Reclocker Driver control
System
IN6D Microprocessor control
&
IN7A OUT7 FPGA
Reclocker
IN7B control
Reclocker Driver
IN7C
IN7D
IN8A OUT8
+3.3V
IN8B Power supply +24V
Reclocker Driver
IN8C
IN8D +3.3VL +5VL
Power supply
Figure 4-5. PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-4. PM-HSR-OB/PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-DOB

Serial Video Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB 8
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HSR-DOB 16
Output connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE
344M, DVB-ASI
to 1.5 Gb/s
Reclocking Reclockable for all data rates defined by
SMPTE 292M/259M/344M, DVB-ASI
except 177Mb/s
> 16 dB, 540 MHz to 1.5 GHz
Jitter < 0.2UI @ frequency tested
Output amplitude 800 mVp-p ± 10%
DC offset 0V ± 0.5V
Rise/fall times 400ps – 1500ps, for SMPTE 259M data
rates
< 270 pS, for SMPTE 292M data rates
Overshoot < 10% of amplitude
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SD with Reclocking

Output Modules
Operation
Figure 4-6. PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Output Module
Note
The PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ are HD-SD output modules with

reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to
2.97 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provides secondary switching, reclocks
SMPTE as well as ASI (270 Mb/s) signals, and send them to the drivers
designed to drive 75Ω loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s
and 2.97 Gb/s, with reclocking for the most common SMPTE data rates in this
range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass,
and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-5 on page 149. An 8×1
differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Table 4-5. Reclocker Operating Modes

Mode Name Description Note
Automatic The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the received Default
data rate is 270 Mb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, or 2.970 Gb/s. If this
reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated and
the reclocked rate is reported.
270 Mb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270Mb/s only. If this Manual mode
1.485 Gb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.4835 Gb/s or 1.485 Manual mode
Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED
is illuminated.
2.970 Gb/s The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 2.967 Gb/s or 2.970 Gb/s Manual mode
only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is
illuminated.
Automatic bypass If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the reclocker Default
without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off.
Forced bypass The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output of the —
reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The corresponding signal
presence LED is turned off.
Automatic mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the corresponding Default
input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The corresponding signal
presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if necessary.)
Forced mute No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch —
setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB+ and
PT-HSR-OB+ modules.

PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules.
Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Special
page 246 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output


Configuration
Table 4-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB+ and
PT-HSR-OB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 4-6. PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List


•
Lock Detect_8 [RO]
Signal Type_1 Displays detected slew rate of • HD
• incoming signal • SD
•
Signal Type_8
•
Mute_8
•
Reclocker Mode_8
Table 4-6. PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Auto Bypass_1 Enables or disables the reclock • Off
•
Auto Bypass_8
Bypass_1 Sets reclocking bypass function • Off
• • On
•
Bypass_8
Enforced Slew Rate_1 Sets slew rate for output signal • HD
• • SD
• • Auto (use detected data rate from
Enforced Slew Rate_8 Signal Type parameter)
Input EQ_1 Sets input EQ setting for onboard • 12 dB

• switchers • 5 dB
•
Input EQ_8
Output Mode_1 Determines if output signal comes • Main module
• from the main module or submodule • Submodule
• (if installed)
Output Mode_8
• • 1483.5/1485
• • 2967/2970
Data Rate_8
require it
• Sync3
• Sync4
PM-HSR-OB+ or PT-HSR-OB+
module

Reclocker Cable
4:1 mux with driver
1:2 fanout HD/SD
A output 1
B
HD/SD
input 1 C
•
D
• 8:1 mux
• Optional
•
processing
•
ROF
2:1 mux
submodule
•
(single to diff.)
• •
• Reclocker
•
•
HD/SD
4:1 mux with
output 8
1:2 fanout
A Cable
B driver
HD/SD
input 8 C
D
Sync inputs
OB2OB
TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V fused
+24 VA Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute

+24 VB Mux control
voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA Reclocker 1-8 control
Reclocker 1-8 reporting
SLID
PIPE CPLD
PRTI
Figure 4-7. PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-7. PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Serial Video Output

Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
to 3.0 Gb/s
Reclocking • Automatic for 2.970 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s,
1.485 Gb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, and 270
Mb/s
• Bypass for all other rates between 3
Mb/s and 3.0 Gb/s
> 10 dB, 1.485 GHz to 2.97 GHz
Jitter < 0.2 UI @ frequency tested
Rise/fall times 400ps – 1500ps, for SMPTE 259M data
rates
< 135 ps, for SMPTE 424M and 292M
data rates
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD with Reclocking Output

Modules
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking
and Dual Output Modules
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-8. PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Output Module
Figure 4-9. PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB Output Module
Note
The SD digital multi-rate output module comes in these variations:

• The PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB are SD output modules with reclocking.
• The PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB are SD output modules with reclocking and
dual outputs.
The PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB digital multi-rate
output modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s)
from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE
and ASI signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75Ω loads. They
support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The
reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute.
• Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at an input SMPTE
data rate (this mode is the default mode)
• Manual mode: manually sets a SMPTE rate for reclocking
• Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL
• Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75Ω output driver feeding the 75Ω
BNC.
An 8×1 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB,
PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB, and PT-SR-DOB modules.
Installation

Configuration
Table 4-8 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB,
PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB, and PT-SR-DOB modules. These parameters are
Table 4-8. PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB User-Controllable Parameters List


•
Lock Detect_8 [RO]
•
Mute_8
•
Reclocker Mode_8
Autobypass_1 Enables or disables the reclock • Off
•
Autobypass_8
Bypass_1 Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking • Off
• function • On
•
Bypass_8
• • 177
• • 270
Data Rate_8 • 360
• 540
require it
• Sync3
• Sync4

IN1A OUT1
IN1B
IN1D
IN2A OUT2
IN2B
IN2D
IN3A OUT3
IN3B
Reclocker Driver
IN3C
IN3D
IN4A OUT4
IN4B
Reclocker Driver
IN4C
IN4D
IN5A OUT5 Monitoring M-OUT

IN5B Switch
IN5D
IN6A OUT6
IN6B Driver rate
IN6C Reclocker Driver control
System
IN6D Microprocessor control
&
IN7A OUT7 FPGA
Reclocker
IN7B control
Reclocker Driver
IN7C
IN7D
IN8A OUT8
+3.3V
IN8B Power supply +24V
Reclocker Driver
IN8C
IN8D +3.3VL +5VL
Power supply
Figure 4-10. PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-9. PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB Serial

Video Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB 8
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB 16
Impedance 75Ω
to 540 Mb/s
Reclocking Reclockable for all signals defined by
SMPTE 259M/344M, DVB-ASI except
177 Mb/s
DC offset 0 V ± 0.5 V
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD with Reclocking

Output Modules
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-11. PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Output Module
Note
The PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ are digital multi-rate output modules with

reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to
540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the
SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75Ω
loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with no
reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual,
bypass, and mute.
• Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at a 270 Mb/s data rate
(this mode is the default mode)
• Manual mode: manually sets a 270 Mb/s rate for reclocking
• Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL
• Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75Ω output driver feeding the 75Ω
BNC.
An 8×1 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB+ and
PT-SR-OB+ modules.
Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Special
page 246 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output

Configuration
Table 4-10 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB+ and
PT-SR-OB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 4-10. PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List


•
Lock Detect_8 [RO]
Table 4-10. PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


•
Mute_8
•
Reclocker Mode_8
Auto Bypass_1 Enables or disables the reclock • Off
•
Auto Bypass_8
Bypass_1 Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking • Off
• function • On
•
Bypass_8
Input EQ_1 Sets input EQ setting for onboard • 12 dB
• switchers • 5 dB
•
Input EQ_8
Output Mode_1 Determines if output signal comes • Main module
• from the main module or submodule • Submodule
• (if installed)
Output Mode_8
Data Rate_1 Sets the reclock rate • 270 Mb/s
•
•
Data Rate_8
require it
• Sync3
• Sync4
PM-SR-OB+ or PT-SR-OB+ module

Reclocker Cable
4:1 mux with driver
1:2 fanout SD
A output 1
B
SD
input 1 C
•
D
• 8:1 mux
• Optional
•
processing
•
ROF
2:1 mux
submodule
•
(single to diff.)
• •
• Reclocker
•
•
SD
4:1 mux with
output 8
1:2 fanout
A Cable
B driver
SD
input 8 C
D
Sync inputs
OB2OB
TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V +1.2 V +24 V fused
+24 VA Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute

+24 VB Mux control
voltage monitoring
+5 VL DA core FPGA Reclocker 1-8 control
Reclocker 1-8 reporting
SLID
PIPE CPLD
PRTI
Figure 4-12. PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-11. PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Serial Video Output Specifications

Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 75Ω
to 540 Mb/s
Reclocking • Automatic for 270 Mb/s
• Bypass for all other rates between
3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output

Modules
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output
Modules
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-13. PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Output Module
Figure 4-14. PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Module
Note
The AES output module allows for the connection of 8 or (optionally) 16 output
channels of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module
within the Platinum platform, and is available as a 16-channel card supporting
Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing.
The module receives 32 balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) from
the crosspoint matrix, which are presented to 8 separate 4×1 multiplexers that
determine the final routing of the signal to its destined output channel. Along
with the octal 4×1 muxes, signal level conversion and presence detection are
handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM version uses only
one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation
at the outputs.
The AES output module also provides output presence detection and true output
monitoring on each of the 8 (or 16) channels.

The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-OB and
the PT-AEB-OB output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O module
corresponds to the PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEC-OB output modules. DB-25
connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O
used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.

PM-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB, PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules.
Installation


Configuration
Table 4-12 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-OB,
PM-AEC-OB, PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules. These parameters are
Table 4-12. PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB

User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock Detect_1 [RO] Indicates the presence or absence of a • Signal absent
• valid signal • Signal present
•
Lock Detect_8 [RO]
Back Module Type Reports coax or balanced back module • PT-AEBT-BMO
• PT-AECT-BMO
• PT-AEB-BMO
• PT-AEC-BMO
•
Mute_8
require it
• Sync3
• Sync4
FPGA- FPGA-
Input 1A based Input 5A based
Input 1B signal Output 1+ Input 5B signal Output 5+
presence Output 1- presence Output 5-
Input 1C detect & Input 5C detect &
Input 1D output Monitor 1 Input 5D output Monitor 5
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
FPGA- FPGA-
switching switching
Internal
control
busses
Bidirectional frame
control signals
+24VA In +5V
from frame Back panel ID
+3.3V Control
+24VB In On Board +2.5V Logic PIPE
from frame Supply PRTI
+1.5V Card health and
+5VL In -5V signal presence LEDs
from frame
Figure 4-16. PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-13. PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
J2 (Outputs 1 – 8) DB-25 Pin No.

1+ 13
1- 12
1 Ground 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Ground 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Ground 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Ground 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Ground 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Ground 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Ground 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1
Specifications
Note
Table 4-14. PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio

Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output type Balanced, transformer coupled
Output connector DB-25
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals from
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Jitter < 5ns
Output amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110Ω load
Rise/fall times 5 ns – 30 ns
Propagation delay < 170 ns
Table 4-15. PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB Coaxial Digital Audio Output

Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor)
Impedance 75Ω
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Jitter < 5 ns
Output amplitude 1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75Ω load
Table 4-15. PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB Coaxial Digital Audio Output

Specifications
Item Specification
Rise/Fall times 30 ns – 44 ns
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced

Output Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial
Output Modules with TDM Capability
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-17. PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB AES Balanced Output Module
Figure 4-18. PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Module

Note
The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels
of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the
Platinum platform, and supports Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) AES
routing.
Audio processing functions, as well as signal level conversion and presence
detection, are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM
output module uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various
AES signals for presentation at the outputs.
The AES TDM output module also provides output presence detection and true
output monitoring on each of the 16 channels.

The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-OB
and the PT-AEBT-OB output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O
module corresponds to the PM-AECT-OB and PT-AECT-OB output modules.
DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel
I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be
used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.

PM-AEBT-OB, PM-AECT-OB, PT-AEBT-OB, and PT-AECT-OB modules.
Installation
output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact

Configuration
Table 4-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-OB,
PM-AECT-OB, PT-AEBT-OB, and PT-AECT-OB modules. These parameters
are accessible via the RouterMapper Configure Module Parameters and/or
Module Parameters list boxes. See your RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 4-16. PM-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable

Parameters List

Back Module Type Reports coax or balanced back module • PT-AEBT-BMO
• PT-AECT-BMO
• PT-AEB-BMO
• PT-AEC-BMO
• • 500 Hz
Tone_16 • 1K
Audio Delay 1 Settable audio delay for 0 to 60 in 1 ms increments

• synchronization with video
•
Audio Delay 16

Disconnect State Select whether to transmit AES • Silence
silence or a DC level when signal • DC
presence is lost
•
•
Lock Detect_16 [RO]
Phase Alarm_1 Alarm set if right and left channels are • No phase error
•
Phase Alarm_16
Audio Level Adjustment_1 Indicates gain/attenuation applied to 1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
• mono channel
•
•
•
Mute_16
Summing_16 • Both

• Sync 3
• Sync 2
• Sync 1
require it

Transition_1 Determines type of transition on a • Quiet switch
• given destination • V-fade
• • Fade/cut
Transition_16 • Cut/fade
• Synchronous switch
Duration_1 Determines transition length • No duration
• • Shortest
• • Short
Duration_16 • Medium short
• Medium
• Medium long
• Long
• Longest
• Sync3
• Sync4
Input 1A
Input 1B
Input 1C
Input 1D
Input 2A AES output 1
Input 2B
Input 2C Monitor 1
Input 2D
Input 3A AES output 2
Input 3B Monitor 2
Input 3C
Input 3D AES output 3
Input 4A
Input 4B Monitor 3
Input 4C •
Input 4D •
Input 5A
Input 5B •
Input 5C FPGA-based signal •
Input 5D presence detection and •
Input 6A
Input 6B internal distribution •
Input 6C •
Input 6D
Input 7A •
Input 7B •
Input 7C AES output 16
Input 7D
Input 8A Monitor 16
Input 8B
Input 8C
Input 8D
TDM input
Internal control bus
+24VA in Card status and

from frame +5V signal presence
+24VB in On-board +3.3V LEDs
from frame supply PIPE
+2.5V Control logic
Back module
+5VL in +1.2V PRTI
ID signals
from frame
Figure 4-20. PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-17. PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information
1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

1+ 13
1- 12
1 Ground 25
2+ 24
2- 23
2 Ground 11
3+ 10
3- 9
3 Ground 22
4+ 21
4- 20
4 Ground 8
5+ 7
5- 6
5 Ground 19
6+ 18
6- 17
6 Ground 5
7+ 4
7- 3
7 Ground 16
8+ 15
8- 14
8 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1
Table 4-17. PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information (Continued)

1+ 1- 2S 3+ 3- 4S 5+ 5- 6S 7+ 7- 8S Spare
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1S 2+ 2- 3S 4+ 4- 5S 6+ 6- 7S 8+ 8-
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

9+ 13
9- 12
9 Ground 25
10+ 24
10- 23
10 Ground 11
11+ 10
11- 9
11 Ground 22
12+ 21
12- 20
12 Ground 8
13+ 7
13- 6
13 Ground 19
14+ 18
14- 17
14 Ground 5
15+ 4
15- 3
15 Ground 16
16+ 15
16- 14
16 Ground 2
Spare Ground 1
Specifications
Table 4-18. PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio

Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type Balanced, transformer coupled
Impedance 110Ω
Signal type AES3
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Jitter < 5ns
Output amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110Ω load
Rise/fall times 5 ns – 30 ns
Table 4-19. PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Coaxial Digital Audio Output

Specifications
Item Specification
Output connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor)
Impedance 75Ω
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
Jitter < 5 ns
Output amplitude 1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75Ω load
Rise/Fall times 30 ns – 44 ns
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video

Encoder Modules
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog
Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-21. PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB SD to Analog Video Encoder Module
Figure 4-22. PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB SD to Analog Video Encoder Module with Dual Output
Note
The SD to analog video encoder module comes in these variations:

• The PM-ENC-OB and PT-ENC-OB are SD-to-analog video encoder output
modules.
• The PM-ENC-DOB and PT-ENC-DOB are SD-to-analog video encoder
output modules with dual outputs.
The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB SD-to-analog video encoder modules convert a
block of eight serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video
signals.
The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB modules accept 32 serial digital (SD) video
signals from the crosspoint module, which are presented to four FPGA-based
deserializer chips. Within each of the deserializer chips are two 4×1
multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver blocks.
The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the
functions of extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit-serial
clock. To do this they
• Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE
non-return to zero (NRZI) SDI stream
• Find the “x3FF” start of active video/end of active video (EAV / SAV)
frame boundaries
• Load the decoded data stream into a “serial in/parallel out” (SIPO) shift
register for exporting the data in 10-bit parallel form
The 10-bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27
MHz pipeline clock, where it is processed for digital noise reduction (DNR) to
reduce low-amplitude, high-frequency noise. Gamma correction, sub-alias
filtering (SAF), and user-based color adjustments are performed in the “parallel
CCIR-601” domain. The signal is then separated into its chrominance and
luminance components, sent through the low-pass filters (LPF) to reduce
aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal, and resampled at
2X to further reduce aliasing. The oversampled parallel signal is finally
converted to analog composite video within the 10-bit DAC stage, sent through
a 4-pole low pass filter, and buffered for presentation to the output BNC
connector.
Through the control system, you can control the low-pass and notch filter
selection, NTSC or PAL video standard, video pedestal, internal test signal
generator, chrominance level and hue (NTSC only), brightness, sharpness, and
digital noise reduction.
You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters, as a
“tradeoff” between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place.
Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via
card-edge mounted LEDs (Output 1 – Output 8) and via the control system.
Additional system LEDs indicate the following:
• The power supply indicator (POWER) shows that +24V is present on the
module.
• The control system acknowledgment indicator (ACT CTRL) shows that the
control system is communicating with the module.
• The Output Active warning indicator (ACT OUT) indicates that a valid
input signal has been switched to an output on this module.

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ENC-OB,
PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.

PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.
Installation


Configuration
Table 4-20 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ENC-OB,
PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules. These parameters
are accessible via the RouterMapper Configure Module Parameters and/or
Module Parameters list boxes. See your RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 4-20. PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB User-Controllable

Parameters List
Chrominance Filter Type_1 Sets chrominance filter type • 1.3 MHz
• • 0.65 MHz
• • 1 MHz
Chrominance Filter Type_8 • 2 MHz
• Reserved
• CIF
• QCIF
• 3 MHz
Luminance Filter Type_1 Enables or disables luminance filter • NTSC low pass
• type • PAL low pass
• • NTSC notch
Luminance Filter Type_8 • PAL notch
• Extended
• CIF
• QCIF
• Reserved
Video Standard_1 Sets video standard • NTSC
• • PAL-B/D/G/H/I
• • PAL-N
Video Standard_8
Pedestal Enable_1 Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level • Enable
• • Disable
•
Pedestal Enable_8
DNR_1 Enables or disables digital noise • Enable
• reduction • Disable
•
DNR_8
Brightness_1 Sets brightness level –7°-22°
•
•
Brightness_8
Contrast_1 Sets contrast level 0-192
•
•
Contrast_8
Table 4-20. PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB User-Controllable

Chrominance Saturation_1 Sets chrominance saturation level 0-1255
•
•
Chrominance Saturation_8
Chrominance Hue (Tint)_1 Sets chrominance hue level –22°-22°
•
•
Chrominance Hue (Tint)_8
Lock Detect_1 Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
•
Lock Detect_8
require it
• Sync3
• Sync4
Figure 4-23. PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-21. PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB

Serial Digital to Analog Video Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB 8
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB 16
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type NTSC, PAL
Output amplitude 1.0Vp-p ± 10%
Return loss > 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Filtering CCIR-601 compliant
Resolution 10 bits
Frequency response ± 0.05 dB to 5.2 MHz
Differential gain < 0.8%
Differential phase < 0.6 °
Bulk delay < 80 μs
Signal to noise ratio (RMS) > 65 dB unified - weighting
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio

Converter Output Modules
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-24. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Audio D/A Output Module
Note
The PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB audio D/A output module provides the

platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing
system. This option provides 8 channels of conversion with basic Platinum I/O
module features. The PT-DACT-OB option provides greater conversion
capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). This option
provides 16 channels of conversion using the same front and back module
combinations. See page 195 for more information.

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DAC-OB and the
PT-DAC-OB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The

The optional PT-HSR-OM module provides output monitoring of AES signals
for the PM-DAC-OB and PT-DAC-OB modules.
Installation


Configuration
Table 4-20 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DAC-OB and
PT-DAC-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 4-22. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List


Lock Detect_1 Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
• input signal • Signal present
•
Lock Detect_8
Mute_1 Mutes audio • Mute on
• • Mute off
•
Mute_8
Vol A_1 Attenuate the audio signal in 1 dB • –127 dB - 0 dB
• increments
•
Vol A_8
Board Level Hysteresis Represents hysteresis for all 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
parameters that require it
• Sync3
• Sync4
OM A
Serial clock
Left right clk

Receiver DAC
Serial data Output
OM B
1
I2C Bus I2C Module
[1 of 4] Control Bus [1 of 8]
Output driver control
/4
I2C
Pipe I2C
Output /8
AES input Output cell 2
1A-1D 2 OM cntrl
Frame control
A Output
Output cell 3 B 3 PWR
monitoring
AES input Output +17VA
Output cell 4
2A-2D 4 +24VA -17VA
+5V
Output +24VB +3.3V
Output cell 5 +2.5V
5 +1.5V
Frame power
AES input Output

Output cell 6
3A-3D 6
Output Output
Output cell 7
7 A monitoring
B
OM 1
AES input Output
FPGA
Output cell 8 •
4A-4D 8
• ROF+
ROF-
•
•
A
AES input
OM 8
5A-5D B
Figure 4-26. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Functional Block Diagram

OM cntrl
AES input
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

6A-6D
AES input
7A-7D
AES input
8A-8D
191
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-23. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Pinout Diagram
Outputs 1 – 4 DB-44 Pin No. Outputs 5 – 8 DB-44 Pin No.

1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Ground 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A Ground 20
2B Ground 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Ground 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Ground 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
4A+ 10 8A, 8B Ground 18
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Ground 37
Specifications
Table 4-24. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output –

Standard Version
Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz AES frame rate.
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Output type Balanced
Impedance 66Ω
Maximum output amplitude +28 dBu
Conversion type 128x over sampling, fifth-order,
delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
AES frame rates 32 kHz – 192 kHz
Linearity deviation < ±0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
Idle channel noise < -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
Dynamic range > 100 dB CCIR-RMS
hostile, typical
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 4-25. PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output –

600Ω Version
Item Specification
Number of outputs 8
Impedance 600Ω
Maximum output amplitude +22 dBm
Conversion type 128x oversampling, fifth-order,
delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
Idle channel noise < –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
hostile, typical
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio

Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-27. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Audio D/A Output Module
Note
The PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB audio D/A output module provides the

platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing
system. The TDM option provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced
Platinum I/O module features. The PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB provides
greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing
(TDM).

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DACT-OB and
the PT-DACT-OB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The

The optional PT-HSR-OM module provides output monitoring of AES signals
for the PM-DACT-OB and PT-DACT-OB modules.
Installation


Configuration
Table 4-26 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DACT-OB and
PT-DACT-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper
Table 4-26. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List


• • 500Hz
Tone_16 • 1K
Audio Delay_1 Settable audio delay for 0 to 60 in 1 ms increments

• synchronization with video
•
Audio Delay_16
•
•
•
Lock Detect_16 [RO]
Phase Alarm_1 Alarm set if right and left channels are • No phase error
•
Phase Alarm_16
Table 4-26. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued)


Audio Level Adjustment_1 Indicates gain/attenuation applied to 10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments
• mono channel
•
•
•
Mute_16
Summing_16 • Both

• Sync 3
• Sync 2
• Sync 1
Sync Select Selects one of the four sync inputs as • Sync 4
the external reference • Sync 3
• Sync 2
• Sync 1
require it
Transition_1 Determines type of transition on a • Quiet switch
• given destination • V-fade
• • Fade/cut
Transition_16 • Cut/fade
• Synchronous switch
Duration_1 Determines transition length • No duration
• • Shortest
• • Short
Duration_16 • Medium short
• Medium
• Medium long
• Long
• Longest
OM A
Serial clock
AES input Left right clk

Receiver DAC A
1A-1D Serial data Output
OM B
B 1
I2C Bus I2C Module
[1 of 4] Control Bus [1 of 8]
Output driver control
AES input /4
I2C
2A-2D Pipe I2C
A Output /8
Output cell 2
B 2 OM cntrl
Frame control
A Output
AES input Output cell 3 B 3 PWR
3A-3D monitoring
A Output
Output cell 4 +17VA
B 4 +24VA -17VA
+5V
A Output +24VB +3.3V
Output cell 5 +2.5V
AES input B 5 +1.5V
Frame power
4A-4D
A Output
Output cell 6
B 6
A Output Output
AES input Output cell 7 B A monitoring
7
5A-5D
A B
OM 1
Output
FPGA
Output cell 8 B •
8
• ROF+
A Output ROF-
Output cell 9 •
AES input B 9 •
6A-6D A
A Output
Output cell 10 B 10 B
OM 16
A Output
B 11 OM cntrl
Figure 4-29. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Functional Block Diagram

7A-7D
A Output
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Output cell 12 B 12
A Output
B 13
8A-8D
A Output
Output cell 14 B 14
A Output
Output cell 15
B 15
TDM input
A Output
Output cell 16 B 16
199
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-27. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information

1A+ 15 5A+ 8
1A- 30 5A- 7
1B+ 43 5B+ 36
1B- 28 5B- 21
2A+ 14 6A+ 6
2A- 13 6A- 5
2A Ground 29 6B+ 34
2B+ 41 6B- 19
2B- 26 6B, 7A Ground 20
2B Ground 40 7A+ 4
3A+ 12 7A- 3
3A- 11 7B+ 32
3A Ground 27 7B- 17
3B+ 24 7B Ground 33
3B- 39 8A+ 1
4A+ 10 8A, 8B Ground 18
4A- 9 8B+ 31
4B+ 23 8B- 16
4B- 38
4B Ground 37
Table 4-27. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information (Continued)

9A+ 15 13A+ 8
9A- 30 13A- 7
9B+ 43 13B+ 36
9B- 28 13B- 21
10A+ 14 14A+ 6
10A- 13 14A- 5
10A Ground 29 14B+ 34
10B+ 41 14B- 19
10B- 26 14B, 15A Ground 20
10B Ground 40 15A+ 4
11A+ 12 15A- 3
11A- 11 15B+ 32
11A Ground 27 15B- 17
11B+ 24 15B Ground 33
11B- 39 16A+ 1
12A+ 10 16A, 16B Ground 18
12A- 9 16B+ 31
12B+ 23 16B- 16
12B- 38
12B Ground 37
Specifications
Table 4-28. PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Digital to

Analog Audio Output – Standard Version
Item Specification
Impedance 66Ω
Maximum output amplitude +28 dBu
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB
steps, ± 0.5 dB
delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
Linearity deviation < ±0.5 dB
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +23 dBu
hostile, typical
(hostile channels driven at –1 dBFS = +23
dBu)

Analog Audio Output – 600Ω Version
Item Specification
Impedance 600Ω

Analog Audio Output – 600Ω Version (Continued)
Maximum output amplitude +22 dBm
Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB
steps, ± 0.5 dB
delta-sigma
Resolution 24 bits
THD+N < 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +17 dBm
hostile, typical
(hostile channels driven at –1 dBFS = +17
dBm)
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial

Video Transmitter
Operation
Module Operation
Figure 4-30. PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video Transmitter

(PT-FO-BMO Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
The PT-HSR1310S-OB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video transmitter

module. It has eight fiber optical transmitter receptacles mounted on the metal
back panel of the back module. A switched video data stream by the crosspoint
module enters the front module. A 4×1 mux in the reclocker integrated circuit
serves as a secondary switcher for the entire switching matrix. The selected data
is processed by the reclocker. The reclocker provides three processing modes:
Reclocking (automatic, manual); Bypass (automatic, enforced); and Mute.
The processed data stream then enters a 1×2 buffer. One of the outputs is fed to
the back module for E/O conversion. The second output is used for system
monitoring.
An E-O converter is installed in each channel on the back module. It converts
electrical data processed by the reclocker to optical data. This conversion stage
also provides alarm and auto-protection functions.
The control circuit consists of an FPGA and serial-to-parallel shift registers. In
addition to common functions (PIPE port, PRTI port, slot ID, and power start
trigger), this FPGA and associated circuits also control video monitoring and
data loss of the reclockers, laser failure, and back module identification.
On PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, the channel status LEDs are bicolor, as

follows:
Table 4-30. PT-HSR1310S-OB Channel Status LEDs

Channel Status
Meaning
LED Color
Off (no color) Data is not reclocked, laser diode is still functional (no data is
output or the output data bypasses the re-clocking circuit)
Green Data is detected and reclocked, laser diode is functional
Red Laser diode is deactivated, regardless of whether or not data is
reclockable

The PT-FO-BMO back module corresponds to the PT-HSR1310S-OB module.
Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Specialized
Installation and Removal Procedures for Fiber Optical Modules” on page 250
for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of PM-FO-OB and
PT-HSR1310S-OB modules. (Also, see Appendix B: “Laser Safety Guidelines”
on page 299, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional

expansion of back panel modules. If you need to order additional components,
Configuration
Table 4-31 on page 206 lists the user-controllable parameters for
PT-HSR1310S-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via the
Table 4-31. PT-HSR1310S-OB User-Controllable Parameters List

Lock detect Indicates a signal is present on the • No
output • Yes
Laser failure [RO] Indicates an output laser driver has • No

failed • Yes
Mute Indicates that an output is muted or • Mute

unmuted • Unmute
Reclocker mode When active, the standard is • Manual

automatically detected from the input • Auto
data rate
Auto bypass Automatically bypasses the reclocker • Off
stage when the PLL is not locked • On
Bypass For signals routed to wideband • Off

crosspoint only - tells control to make • On
switch regardless of signal presence
Laser enable Enables the output laser • On
• Off
Enforced slew rate Forces the slew rate on the output • HD
signal • SD
ASI/177 select Disables 177 Mbps data rate in the • 177

AUTO data rate detection circuit • ASI
(prevents a false lock to 177 Mbps
when using DVB/ASI)
Data rate Sets the data reclock rate • 143
• 177
• 270
• 360
• 540
• 1483.5/1485
Board level hysteresis Sets hysteresis for all parameters that 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
require it
Sync select Determines which reference signal the • Sync1
board uses to switch • Sync2
• Sync3
• Sync4
Figure 4-31. PT-HSR1310S-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Table 4-32. PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical HD / SD Serial Video

Transmitter Output Specifications
Item Specification
Connector ST
Return loss 20 dB
Mode Single-mode (9μm)
Laser FP
Wavelength 1310 nm ± 40 nm
or
1550 nm ± 40 nm
Maximum spectral line width 10 nm
Maximum output power < -7.5 dBm
Minimum output power > -9.5 dBm
Rise time and fall time <1.5 nS for SD
<270 pS for HD
Extinction ratio > 6.6 (8.2 dB.)
Jitter < 0.2 UI
Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules
Overview
descriptions of the crosspoint modules available for the Platinum router. A
General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum
crosspoint module operates. Each crosspoint module is further described in
terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation,
configuration, and functional block diagram.
• “Crosspoint Module General Description” on page 210
• “PM-40×32-3G5: 40×32 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules” on page 214
• “PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64×64 Crosspoint Modules” on page 216
• “PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28:
128×256 Crosspoint Module” on page 222
• “PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint
Crosspoint Module General Description

The crosspoint module plugs into the module interconnect backplane via a
high-density, high-speed connector. Switching is performed in a three-stage
“make before break” process that eliminates unnecessary signals on the MI,
while continually providing the output module reclocker IC a valid source so
that the reclocker remains locked:
1. The crosspoint module is switched so that the previous and next sources are
both active on the output module reclocker input.
2. The output module reclocker is switched to the next source.
3. The crosspoint module switches off the previous source.
All settings for the crosspoint circuitry are reset on module insertion within one
frame (per sync present) of when the resource module detects card presence.
• The LED labelled “ACT XPT” is the active crosspoint indicator. It indicates
which crosspoint card is active in redundant configurations.
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the
front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
Temperature sensing circuits are present on the crosspoint module, so that the
internal frame temperature can be monitored.
Controllable Parameters Lists

with the [RO] designator are “read-only.” Crosspoint module parameters lists
are provided on the following pages:
Table 5-1. Crosspoint Modules’ User-Controllable Parameters Lists

Parameter
Module Name
List Location
PM-40×32-3G5: 40×32 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules page 215
PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64×64 Crosspoint Modules Page 217
PM-72×64-3G5: 72×64 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules page 219
PM-72×64-3G5: 72×64 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules Page 221
PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128× Page 223
256-3G28: 128×256 Crosspoint Module
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATD Page 227
M32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced
TDM Crosspoint Modules
1 The
Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab.
Signal Flow Diagram
Destination
outputs
Crosspoint
Source inputs Auxiliary
outputs
CPB
Aux inputs
Destination
outputs
Crosspoint
Auxiliary
MI connector
MI connector
outputs
parallel bus
Crosspoint
ENET
XPT Micro XPT FPGA PRTIX
PIPE
Figure 5-1. Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Crosspoint Module
64TDM 64TDM 64TDM 64TDM

signals TDM signals signals signals
buffers TDM
buffers
TDM XPT module connector

FPGA/
microprocessor(s)
TDM XPT
TDM “inputs” TDM “outputs”
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI Sync(3)
Select
Sync 4 Sync
Sync separator
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Note: The TDM “inputs” and TDM “outputs” may be bidirectional. The terms “inputs” and “outputs” refer to the
general case.
Figure 5-2. Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum TDM Crosspoint Module
PM-40×32-3G5: 40×32 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules

Operation
Figure 5-3. PM-40×32-3G5 Crosspoint Module
Note
PM-40×32-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
The PM-40×32-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input

modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches
auxiliary signals.
The PM-40×32-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 40×32 I/O signal switch fabric
as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
Figure 5-1 on page 212 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint
module.
Installation
All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See “Special
Module Firmware” on page 241 and “Installing Crosspoint Modules” on page
248 for the procedure for field expansion of these crosspoint modules. If you
need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Configuration
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-40×32-3G5
Table 5-2. PM-40×32-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List
(* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value)

Temperature Reading [RO] Monitors internal frame temperature -55°C – 125°C in 0.5°C increments

See Figure 5-1 on page 212.
Specifications
There are no separate specifications associated with this module.
PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9: 64×64 Crosspoint

Modules
Operation
Figure 5-4. PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 Crosspoint Module
Note
PM-64×64-X9 and PM-64×64-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames only.
The PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals

accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It
also switches auxiliary signals.
The PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 64×64 I/O
signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
module.
Installation
248 for the procedure for field expansion of crosspoint modules. If you need to
Department.
Configuration
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-64×64-X9 and
PM-64×64-3G9 modules. These parameters are accessible via the
Table 5-3. PM-64×64-X9/PM-64×64-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List



Specifications
PM-72×64-3G5: 72×64 3-Gb/s Crosspoint Modules

Operation
Figure 5-5. PM-72×64-3G5 Crosspoint Module
Note
PM-72×64-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
The PM-72×64-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input

auxiliary signals.
The PM-72×64-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 72×64 I/O signal switch fabric
as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
module.
Installation
Department.
Configuration
Table 5-4 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-72×64-3G5
Table 5-4. PM-72×64-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List



Specifications
PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9: 128×128
Crosspoint Module
Operation
Figure 5-6. PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 Crosspoint Module
Note
PM-128×128-X9 and PM-128×128-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames
only.
The PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals

accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It
also switches auxiliary signals.
The PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 128×128
I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch
capability.
module.
Installation
Department.
Configuration
Table 5-5 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-128×128-X9 and
PM-128×128-3G9 modules. These parameters are accessible via the
Table 5-5. PM-128×128-X9/PM-128×128-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List



Specifications
PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/
PT-128×256-3G28: 128×256 Crosspoint Module
Operation
Figure 5-7. PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28 Crosspoint

Module
Note
PT- series crosspoint modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU
frames.
The PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28
crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes
these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. This
crosspoint module can be used in 9RU, 15RU, or 28RU frames.
The PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28
crosspoint matrix contains a 128×256 I/O signal switch fabric as well as
additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability.
module.
Installation
Department.
Configuration
Table 5-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-128×256-X15,
PT-128×256-3G15, PT-128×256-X28, and PT-128×256-3G28 modules. These
parameters are accessible via the RouterMapper Configure Module Parameters
and/or Module Parameters list boxes. See your RouterMapper Configuration
Utility Reference Guide for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 5-6. PT-128×256-X15/PT-128×256-3G15/PT-128×256-X28/PT-128×256-3G28

User-Controllable Parameters List


Specifications
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-
ATDM32-X15/
PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM
Crosspoint Modules
Operation
Figure 5-8. PM-ATDM9-X5 Advanced TDM Crosspoint Module
Figure 5-9. PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28

Advanced TDM Crosspoint Module
The advanced TDM crosspoint module switches audio signals from input
modules and distributes them to output modules, via a proprietary time-division
multiplexed transport scheme. It offers advanced parametric transition type
functions such as quiet switching, V-fade, fade-cut, cut-fade, and synchronous
switching. (The cut associated with the fade-cut and cut-fade settings are
minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching artifacts.) It also allows
for certain audio effects for a given destination.
The advanced TDM crosspoint module is available in the following sizes:
• PM-ATDM9-X5
The PM-ATDM9-X5crosspoint module switches signals accepted from
input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also
switches auxiliary signals. The PM-ATDM9-X5crosspoint matrix contains
a 9×8 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint
switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 5RU frames only.
On 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the
crosspoint module, so a separate sync module is not required. Sync module
operation is the same as that of the PT-SYNC module used with other
Platinum frames. See page 57 for a description of the sync module
operation.
PM-ATDM16-X9
The PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input
auxiliary signals. The PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint matrix contains a 16×16 I/O
This crosspoint module can be used in 9RU frames only.
PT-ATDM16-X15
The PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input
auxiliary signals. The PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint matrix contains a 16×16 I/O
signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability
This crosspoint module can be used in 15RU or 9RU frames.
PT-ATDM32-X15
This crosspoint module can be used in 15RU or 9RU frames.
PT-ATDM32-X28
This crosspoint module can be used in 28RU, 15RU, or 9RU frames.
• PT-ATDM64-X28

This crosspoint module can be used in 28RU, 15RU, or 9RU frames.
Table 5-7 on page 226 shows specific features for advanced TDM crosspoint
modules.
Table 5-7. PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/

PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/ PT-ATDM64-X28 Special Features
Feature Description
Audio processing Processes on 16-bit, 20-bit or 24-bit audio samples; the
number of bits per sample can be detected automatically
by the module
Mono/stereo switching Allows switching of mono inputs, stereo pairs, and
“breakaway” of stereo inputs
Synchronous switching Performs switching of AES streams synchronously with
a reference signal such that switching occurs at an AES
frame boundary
Transitions Supports audio transitions with variable duration when
switching between two audio signals; transitions
supported include
• V Fade
• Fade Cut
• Cut Fade
• Cut (fast transition)
Transition type and duration are assigned on a
per-output basis
Quiet switching Supports quiet switching between two audio signals as a
predefined transition type (quiet switching is
implemented as a V-fade or crossfade of two signals
with minimum duration)
The Platinum frame includes two slots for TDM crosspoint modules. One slot
holds the primary, or active, crosspoint module. The second slot holds an
optional secondary, or “shadow” module, which shadows all operations of the
active module so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is
removed or halted due to error. The shadow module sets its outputs to a
high-impedance state until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all
operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
The TDM crosspoint modules, in conjunction with the Platinum resource
module, determine which slot contains the active module. The modules report
their current status (primary or secondary) to the control system. Appropriate
watchdog circuitry on the module and/or status monitoring on the resource
module will monitor the status of the primary module. It is not necessary to
remove the primary module to cause the secondary module to become active.
Each output may be set independently to the high-impedance state. If an active
module’s output is tri-stated, the output of the secondary module that is

connected to the same output line may be activated through a control setting. In
this state, both modules may be active. This capability allows a partial
switchover to the secondary module in the event of a partial failure of the active
module. It also allows a staged switchover between modules to permit
switchover to be scheduled in a way that reduces potential for disruption of
on-air signals. When all of the outputs of a module are in the high-impedance
mode, it is defined as being in the secondary state.
Installation
All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See
“Installing Crosspoint Modules” on page 248 for the procedure for field
expansion of crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase additional
Configuration
This module has no controllable parameters.
64TDM 64TDM 64TDM 64TDM

signals TDM signals signals signals
buffers TDM
buffers

FPGA/
microprocessor(s)
TDM XPT
TDM “inputs” TDM “outputs”
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI
Sync(3)
Select
Sync 4 Sync
Sync separator
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Note: The TDM “inputs” and TDM “outputs” may be bidirectional. The terms “inputs” and “outputs” refer to the
general case.
Figure 5-10. PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/

PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Chapter 6
Output Monitoring Modules
Overview
descriptions of the output monitoring modules available for the Platinum router.
A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum
output monitoring module operates. Each output monitoring module is further
described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters,
installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and specifications.
• “Output Monitoring Module General Description” on page 230
• “PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module” on page 235
Output Monitoring Module General Description

The output monitoring module allows output monitoring of any output in the
Platinum frame. The signal can be either a copy of the signal that is currently
being sent to a particular output (virtual output monitoring), or a signal taken
directly from the output itself (real output monitoring). The monitoring output
signal is distributed to the output BNCs on the module, eliminating the need for
external distribution. The output monitoring module automatically passes all
data types, and no format selection or configuration is required. An additional
input connector is provided on the output monitoring module for remote
monitoring capabilities.
Figure 6-1 on page 230 through Figure 6-4 on page 233 are block diagrams of
the overall output monitoring architecture for the different frame sizes.
Real output feedback
OM signal
OM Distribution Baseband signal
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
8 ROF
Inputs 1-72
X
Xpt module (2) 2 OM Output module
Driver
X Outputs 1-64
2 OM 4×1
rclk
HS OM module 4×1
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 rclk
HS OM module 4×1
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 rclk
Figure 6-1. Platinum 5RU Frame Output Monitoring Architecture
OM signal
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
Inputs 1-128
16 ROF
X
16 ROF Driver
X Outputs 1-128
4 OM 4×1
rclk
1 OM
HS OM module 4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
OM signal
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
Inputs 1-128
16 ROF
X
Driver
X Outputs 1-128
4 OM 4×1
rclk
Xpt module (3)
Inputs 129-256
16 ROF
X
Xpt module (4) 4 OM
X
4 OM
Output module
Driver
HS OM module 4×1
1 OM
1 OM
Outputs 129-256
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
4×1
rclk
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
1 OM
2×1 1 OM
rclk 1 OM
OM signal
Remote OM input
Xpt module (1)
16 ROF
Inputs 1-128
X
Driver
Inputs 257-384
X 4 spare Outputs 1-128
outputs 4×1
rclk
Xpt module (3)
16 ROF
Inputs 129-256
X
Xpt module (4) 4 OM
Inputs 385-512
X 4 spare
outputs
Output module
Driver
HS OM module 1 OM
Outputs 129-256
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
4×1
rclk
HS OM module 1 OM
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
HS OM module 1 OM
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM
HS OM module 1 OM
Output module
4×1 1 OM
2×1 rclk
1 OM
1 OM Driver
Outputs 257-384
Xpt module (5) 4×1
rclk
Inputs 1-128
4 spare
Xpt module (6)
X outputs
Inputs 257-384 16 ROF
X
4 OM
Xpt module (7)

Output module
Inputs 129-256 4 spare Driver
X outputs Outputs 385-512
Xpt module (8)
4×1
16 ROF rclk
Inputs 385-512
X
4 OM
Controllable Parameters List

and/or changed via the RouterMapper configuration utility. To set the
parameters, you must access the control components (listed on the Detected
Matrices tab of the corresponding Platinum frame). Follow the appropriate steps
(as described in the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide) to
open the Module Parameters list box, and then change the parameter instance to
the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are
“read-only.” Output monitoring module parameters lists are provided on the
following pages:
Table 6-1. Output Monitoring Module Parameters Lists

Parameter List
Module Name
Location
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module Page 236
Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 6-5. Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Monitoring Module
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module

Operation
Module Operation
Figure 6-6. PT-HSR-OM HD/SD Output Monitoring Module
The PT-HSR-OM HD/SD output monitoring module is designed to provide HD

and SD serial video outputs for monitoring purposes, as well as other types of
signals handled by Platinum (such as AES audio). This rear-loading module fits
into any one of four output monitoring module slots (two slots in 5RU frames).
Output monitoring is classified into two categories: real output monitoring and
virtual output monitoring.
Real Output Monitoring
Real output monitoring provides the output signal from the final stage of the
output. For example, the secondary output from each output amplifier in a
PT-HSR-OB module is used for monitoring. The eight monitoring output
signals in a PT-HSR-OB module are applied to an 8×1 switch. The selected
monitoring output is then fed to a crosspoint module. Each crosspoint module
receives up to 16 output monitoring signals from PT-HSR-OB modules, and
switches the selected signal to be monitored to the output monitoring module(s).
Virtual Output Monitoring

The output monitoring signal can also be a copy of the input signal being sent to
a particular output. Since this type of monitoring signal comes directly from the
crosspoint rather than from the output module itself, it is referred to as a virtual
output monitoring signal.
Corresponding Output Module

The PT-HSR-OM monitors the output from the PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB,
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB, PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB/
PT-AEC-OB, PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB, or PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB output
modules.
Installation
Configuration
Table 6-2. PT-HSR-OM Parameters List

Internal/External Signal Select Signal source • External
• Internal
External Input Signal Presence [RO] Reports presence or absence of valid • Signal absent
signal • Signal present
EQ_Bypass Bypasses the EQ stage • EQ bypass

• Equalized
Reclocker_Bypass Bypasses the reclocker stage • Off
• On
Autobypass Reclock automatic bypass; • Reclocker bypass
automatically bypasses the reclocker • Reclocked
stage when the PLL is not locked
Reclocker_Mode Reclock mode • Manual
• Auto
Table 6-2. PT-HSR-OM Parameters List (Continued)


Data Rate Reclock data rate (active only when • 143
RCLK_Mode is set to Manual) • 177
• 270
• 360
• 540
• 1483.5/1485
Mute Mutes the Reclocker outputs • Off
• On
ASI/177 Disables 177Mbps data rate in the • Off
AUTO data rate detection circuit • On
Lock Detect [RO] Lock detect (high when the PLL is • Not locked
locked) • Locked
Signal Type Output slew rate control • SD

• HD
Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for all parameters that • 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
require it

Specifications
Table 6-3. PT-HSR-OM Specifications

Item Specification
Number of external inputs 1
Number of outputs 3 (duplicated and polarity correct signals)
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
344M, DVB-ASI
Most other <1 Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s
to 1.5 Gb/s
Nominal internal input amplitude 800 mVp-p ± 10%
External input equalization Automatic
984 ft (300 m) Belden 1694A for
270Mb/s data rate
492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A for
1.485Gb/s data rate
Reclocking Automatic for SMPTE 292M, SMPTE
259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI except
177 Mb/s
Bypass for all nonstandard rates
Output amplitude 800mVp-p ± 10%
Rise/fall times 400 ps – 1500 ps for SMPTE 259M data
rates
< 270 ps for SMPTE 292M data rates
Chapter 7
Installation
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum
frame during normal operation. Disconnect all power
cords from the frame before you remove the top panel. Do
not apply power to the frame while the top is open unless
the unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel.
This chapter provides information specific to the installation of the Platinum

router. All modules and power supplies ordered will be installed in the Platinum
frame before it is shipped. For field expansion and/or replacement installation
information, see the following topics covered in this chapter:
• “Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components” on page 264
• “Installing Alarm Modules” on page 257
• “Installing a Platinum Frame” on page 263
• “Installing Back Panel Modules” on page 258
• “Replacing Fans” on page 262
• “Installing Input and Output Modules” on page 246
• “Installing Resource Modules” on page 259
• “Installing Output Monitoring Modules” on page 256
• “Installing Power Supplies” on page 260
• “Installing Sync Modules” on page 256
• “Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for Fiber Optical
CAUTION
We recommend that you test your system before its final
installation. Make sure you verify its configuration,
cabling, and proper system operation. Observe proper
anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose
boards and servicing the equipment.
Before You Begin

Review these general rules of thumb before you begin performing any
installations or field upgrades of your Platinum routing system:
• A Platinum router is heavy. Do not attempt to lift a populated frame
yourself.
• The Platinum module and connector layout was designed to make sense
from the BACK — numbering is from left to right, etc.
• Use a static strap or heel strap when handling modules. See “Preventing
Electrostatic Discharge” on page 290 for instructions.
• Do not stack modules directly on top of one another; solder joints and
components on the edges of modules can be damaged this way. Use a
slotted card carrier to stack a quantity of modules.
• Modules need to be properly and completely seated for correct operations.
• Edge connectors on the modules have tight tolerances. Avoid bending or
forcing modules when installing them.
• Take care not to let upper modules drop onto lower modules when inserting
or removing them from the frame. Use the module guides to prevent this.
• The Output Monitoring module slots face alternate directions
(up/down/up/down)
• Verify termination on all video, sync, or X-Y lines.
• Verify that the frame is well grounded. KEEP THE FRAME GROUND IN
PLACE when servicing the frame.
• Platinum’s power supply architecture is configurable, allowing from one to
four power supplies per zone on the router. Depending on configuration and
module population of each zone, two power supplies may be required for
normal operation of the zone.
• Platinum’s internal power supply may be reconfigured or reallocated to
other zones.
Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading

3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module
Firmware
Note
If your 3 Gb modules were installed at the manufacturing facility you do
not need to perform this step.
Before you install your Platinum 3 Gb input, output, and/or crosspoint modules,
you must make sure that you have upgraded the firmware. This section provides
the information you need to successfully perform the upgrade.
The following modules are affected:
• Input modules
• PM-HS-IB+
• PM-S-IB+
• PT-HS-IB+
• PT-S-IB+
• Output modules
• PM-HSR-OB+
• PM-SR-OB+
• PT-HSR-OB+
• PT-SR-OB+
• Crosspoint modules
• PM-40×32-3G5
• PM-72×64-3G5
• PM-64×64-3G9
• PM-128×128-3G9
• PT-128×256-3G15
• PT-128×256-3G28
This discussion presupposes that you have a working knowledge of
RouterMapper and have used its other capabilities. If not, please refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide to familiarize yourself
with its functions before you continue the upgrade procedure.
To perform this upgrade, you must use RouterMapper v.6.04.11 or higher.
RouterMapper’s Platinum Firmware tab allows you to quickly upgrade to the

most current Platinum firmware versions for detected, selected modules; or for
all detected, installed modules. To upgrade the firmware for a Platinum module,
follow these steps.
1. Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the upgrade procedure
will be performed. You can check for the most current firmware upgrades at
the Harris Broadcast Communications Division Premier Customer Support
website.
We recommend that you download the upgrade to <drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\
bin32\Firmware (or if you have NAV installed, to C:\Program Files\ Harris\
RtrWrks\ bin32\ Firmware), as this is the location where RouterMapper first
looks for firmware upgrade files.
2. Perform a Poll on the selected Platinum frame to obtain the latest detected
modules and firmware versions. (For information on how to perform a poll,
see the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide).
3. At the RouterMapper main menu window, double-click the name of the
frame that contains the modules you want to upgrade, and then select the
Firmware tab.
4. From the selected matrix list, click on the modules you want to upgrade.
Multiple modules may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
modules). A quick way to determine the installed firmware version is to
“hover” the mouse over the module icon to the right of the module name.
Figure 7-1. Selected Matrix List
5. Right-click the mouse to bring up the pop-up menu, and then click Assign.
The selected module names will appear in the firmware upgrade list.
Notice that in the firmware upgrade list, the slot location and name of the
module appear, as well as the installed firmware version of that module and
the version number for any known upgrades.
6. Highlight the board you want to upgrade (if you have banks of the same
boards you may highlight all of them at the same time), right-click, and then
select the menu option “Change Firmware.”
Figure 7-2. Change Firmware Menu Option
7. A browser window will open. Default locations are as follows:

• (NAV not installed) C:\Program Files\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware
• (NAV installed) C:\Program Files\Harris\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware
Figure 7-3. Browser Window
8. In the firmware list, click on the module you want to upgrade, and then
click Upgrade.
OR
Click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
Note
If you do not want to upgrade certain modules, click on the
module you do not want to upgrade, and then select either
Delete or Delete All.
9. The Firmware Upgrade message window will appear. The steps in the
upgrade process will be listed as they occur.
If you need to stop the upgrade procedure at any time, click Cancel. The
window will display a message that says “Aborting firmware
upgrade...Please wait.” The upgrade will continue until the firmware
upgrade process is in a safe place to stop.
10. When all of your boards successfully upgrade (the upgrade process tries to
perform the upgrade up to three times each before declaring an upgrade a
total failure) you will see a “Firmware Upgrade Successful” message in the
upgrade dialog box.
Figure 7-4. Successful Firmware Upgrade Message
11. When the process is complete, click OK or click the Close (X) box in the
upper right corner of the Firmware Upgrade message window.
12. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
Installing Input and Output Modules

Note
For installation procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB and PT-HSR1310S-OB
fiber optical modules, see page 250.
To install or replace input and output modules, follow these steps.

1. Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a
#1 Phillips-head screwdriver is required).
2. Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and
tighten screws, then loosen them slightly (about ¼ turn).
3. Open the I/O Guide door.
Note
Input modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of the frame
only. Output modules are inserted into the slots on the left side of the
frame only.
4. From the front of the frame, insert the module into the appropriate slot; be
very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame
(Figure 7-5) and on the guide door (Figure 7-6 on page 247).
5. Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge
and the extractor handle closes.
Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the module’s
inserter/extractor lever is fully seated.
6. Tighten the two screws on the rear of the back panel; then, recheck by
pressing firmly on the inserter/extractor to insure that the module is still
fully seated in the frame.
7. Close and lock the I/O Guide door.
Figure 7-5. Aligning Module with Frame Guide Notches
Figure 7-6. Aligning Module with Guide Door Guide Notches
Installing Crosspoint Modules

Module Placement
On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module (no redundant
module) the crosspoint module can be inserted into either slot 1 or slot 2.
See Figure 1-2 on page 5 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 9RU frames. See
Figure 1-3 on page 6 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 15RU frames.
On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module and one
redundant module, the primary module should be inserted into slot 1 and the
redundant module should be inserted into slot 2.
On 15RU frames with two crosspoint modules and two redundant modules, the
first primary module should be inserted into slot 1, the first redundant module
should be inserted into slot 2, the second primary module should be inserted
into slot 3, and the second redundant module should be inserted into slot 4. See
Table 7-1 for information on which inputs and outsputs are controlled by which
crosspoint module location/slot. See Figure 1-3 on page 6 for an illustration of
the location of slots 1 through 4 for 15RU frames.
Table 7-1. Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 15RU Frames

Crosspoint/Slot Inputs Outputs
Crosspoint slot 1 1 - 128 1 - 256
On 28RU frames, crosspoint module placement is determined by which inputs

and outputs will be controlled. See Table 7-2 for information on which inputs
and outsputs are controlled by which crosspoint module location/slot. See
Figure 1-4 on page 7 for the location of slots 1 through 8 for 28RU frames.
Table 7-2. Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 28RU Frames

Crosspoint/Slot Inputs Outputs
Crosspoint slot 6 257 - 384 257 - 512
Crosspoint slot 7 129 - 256 257 - 512
Crosspoint slot 8 385 - 512 257 - 512
Installing Modules
Installation procedures are the same for all Platinum crosspoint modules.
1. Make sure that the I/O Guide doors are fastened shut.
2. From the front of the frame, insert the module into the desired vertical slot;
be very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame.
• If you insert a crosspoint module into the right vertical slot (i.e., slots 1,
3, 5, and 7), make sure the top of the module faces toward the frame’s
input modules (see Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7. Crosspoint Module Orientation for Right Vertical Slot
• If you insert a crosspoint module into the left vertical slot (that is, slots
2, 4, 6, and 8), make sure the top of the module faces toward the frame’s
output modules
3. Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge
and the extractor lever closes.
You may have some resistance from the module’s inserter/extractor lever
bumping up against the frame. If so, fully extend the extractor lever, and
then guide the module into place.
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures

for Fiber Optical Modules
Installing Modules
Note
PT-HS1310S-IB modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of
the frame only. PT-HSR1310S-OB modules are inserted into the slots on
the left side of the frame only.
Front and back fiber optical modules have plastic caps that protect the fragile
laser connections from damage. You must remove these protective covers
before you install the back and front modules (see Figure 7-8 on page 251).
Figure 7-8 on page 251 shows a typical fiber optical module. Your module’s
appearance may differ slightly from the one shown; however, the protective
covers are positioned identically and must be removed according to the
instructions provided. The installation instructions that follow will prompt you
as to when you should remove the protective covers.
In addition, all fiber optic connections must be inspected and cleaned before
they are assembled. Carefully follow the inspection and cleaning steps
described in the next pages. Additional safety information begins on “Laser
Safety Guidelines” on page 299.
CAUTION
Ensure that you remove the fiber optic protective covers
from the front and back modules before installation. Take
care to avoid touching the fiber optic connections.
Thoroughly clean the connections before installation.
Remove power from the frame before installing or
removing back modules.
Remove these
protective covers
Remove these protective

covers
Figure 7-8. Protective Covers for Laser Connectors
Back Module Installation

Follow these steps to install the back module into the Platinum frame:
1. Remove a blank back plate from the frame. Do not discard the blank back
plates. They may be needed for future configurations.
2. On the side of the back module that inserts into the front module, remove
the inner protective cap from the fiber connection (see Figure 7-8 on
page 251).
CAUTION
Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously
impair or disable a fiber optic network. Observe strict
cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of the fiber.
3. Follow the inspection and cleaning procedure that begins on page 253.
4. If it is already installed, remove the front module from the slot.
5. Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required
frame slot, and then screwing it into place.
6. Apply the adhesive label to the back module if it is supplied separately.
Front Module Installation

1. Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a
#1 Phillips-head screwdriver is required).
2. Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and
tighten screws, then loosen them slightly (about ¼ turn).
3. On the side of the back connector that inserts into the module, remove the
inner protective cap from the laser insertion slot. See Figure 7-8 on
page 251 for its location.
CAUTION
Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously
impair or disable a fiber optic network. Observe strict
cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of the fiber.
4. Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required
frame slot, and then screwing it into place.
5. Gently remove the outer and inner protective caps from the laser. See
Figure 7-8 on page 251 for their locations.
CAUTION
Do not touch the end, edge, or tip of the laser. This
sensitive piece of equipment is susceptible to damage or
misalignment if touched.
6. Follow the fiber cleaning instructions that begin on page 253.

7. Ensure that your front module matches with a corresponding back module
of the same name, and then slide the module into the guides on the frame
floor.
8. When the module edge is flush with the guide, close the extractor handle.
The module is properly seated when its edge is flush with the guide edge
and the extractor handle closes.
9. Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation. To prevent
overheating, keep the front panel closed and all back module plate slots
covered during operation.
Removing Modules
Front Module Removal
Follow these steps to remove a front module from the Platinum frame:
2. Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module, and then pull the
module out of its slot; use the handle as a lever.
3. Close the I/O Guide door to ensure proper frame ventilation.
Back Module Removal

Follow these steps to remove a back module from the Platinum frame:
1. Remove the front module, as described above.
2. Unscrew the top of the corresponding back module, and then tip it towards
you.
3. Pull the bottom lip of the back module from its slot.
4. Reinstall a new or blank back plate in the empty slot to ensure proper frame
ventilation.
5. Reinstall the front module, and then repower the frame.
Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections

Small amounts of microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair
or disable a fiber optic network. To ensure that your network operates reliably,
you must carefully inspect and clean each connection when installing fiber
optical products.
Table 7-3 lists some typical contaminants of a fiber optic connection. The
inspection and cleaning procedure begins on page 254.
Table 7-3. Typical Contaminants

Contaminant Comments
Dust particle, 1 micron Can block up to 1% of the light transmission,
creating a loss of 0.05 dB
Dust particle, 9 microns Although microscopic, the particle can completely
block the fiber core
Human hair Typically 50 to 75 microns in diameter
Oil Frequently caused by touching
Film residues Can accumulate from vapors or smoke
Powdery coatings Can be left behind after water or other solvents
evaporate
Important Points
• Before you begin cleaning, always inspect the fiber connections.
• Inspect and clean both fiber ends every time you make a connection.
• Keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connectors.
• Do not touch the end of a fiber.
• Store unused protective caps in a clean resealable container, located nearby
for easy access.
• Do not reuse cleaning tissues or swabs.
• Do not allow alcohol or another wet cleaning agent to dry on a fiber end.
• Never touch the dispenser tip of an alcohol bottle or any clean portion of a
tissue or swab.
• Use care when handling the fiber; do not twist or pull.
• Keep your cleaning fluids away from open flame or spark.
Figure 7-9 describes the acceptable limits of defects in a fiber connection.
Zone 1
Scratches and dust (0 to 20 micron diameter)
No scratches or digs are allowed
Zone 2
(20 to 50 micron diameter)
Maximum of 3 scratches <1.0 micron width is acceptable;
Maximum 1.0 micron light dig is acceptable
Zone 3
(50 to 126 micron diameter)
Maximum 25 micron dig is acceptable;
Maximum scratch size of 1.0 micron is acceptable
Maximum 25 micron diameter dig is acceptable
Figure 7-9. Fiber Optic Cross-Section
Inspection
To inspect and clean the fibers, follow these steps:
1. Ensure the fiber is not “live.”
WARNING
Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a
microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to
stare at an energized fiber end.
2. Inspect the fiber endface with a fiberscope.

3. If the fiber endface is clean, return to the installation instructions on page
251 for back modules or page 252 for front modules.
If the connector is dirty, proceed to the dry cleaning instructions below.
Dry Cleaning
If you are using cartridge or pocket-style dry cleaning tools, follow the
manufacturer’s directions. If you are using lint-free wipes, follow these steps:
1. Fold the lint-free wipe four to eight times into a square, taking care to avoid
touching the cleaning surface of the wipe.
2. Lightly wipe the fiber tip in the central portion of the lint-free wipe.
CAUTION
Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave
scratches.
3. Repeat the wiping action on another clean section of the wipe or a new
wipe.
4. Inspect the connector again with the fiberscope.
5. If the connection is clean, return to the installation steps on page 251 for
back modules, or page 252 for front modules.
If the connector is still dirty, proceed to the wet cleaning instructions.
Wet Cleaning
Using 99% isopropyl alcohol and lint-free wipes, follow these steps to wet clean
the fiber:
1. Fold the wipe into a square, about 4 to 8 layers thick.
2. Moisten one section of the lint-free wipe with one drop of 99% alcohol,
ensuring that a portion of the wipe remains dry.
3. Lightly wipe the fiber end in the alcohol-moistened portion of the lint-free
wipe.
4. Immediately repeat the wiping action on the dry section of the wipe,
removing any residual alcohol.
5. Inspect the fiber endface again, and if necessary, repeat the wet cleaning
with another clean section of the lint-free wipe.
CAUTION
Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave
scratches.
6. Dry clean any remaining residue, and then inspect the connector again.
7. If the contamination persists, repeat the dry and wet cleaning procedure
until the endface is clean.
If the fiber end still remains dirty after repeated cleaning attempts, call
Customer Service for further instructions.
If the fiber end is clean, return to the installation instructions on page 251
for back modules, or page 252 for front modules.
Installing Output Monitoring Modules

To install or replace the optional output monitoring module, follow these steps.
1. On the rear of the Platinum frame, remove the two screws holding the
option slot cover plate. (A standard Phillips-head screwdriver is required.)
Do not discard these screws, as you will need them again.
2. Align the rear of the output monitoring module in the guide notches on
either side of the frame opening.
3. Noting the alignment of the module’s mating connector inside the frame,
slide the module into the frame.
4. Re-install the two cover plate screws at either end of the output monitoring
module rear panel.
5. Configure the starting control level, destination, and source as described in
your RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Manual.
Installing Sync Modules

To install or replace sync modules, follow these steps.
2. Locate the appropriate slot for the sync module, above the resource module
(see Figure 1-7 on page 10).
3. Align the sync module in the guide notches on either side of the frame
opening.
4. From the front of the frame, slide the module into the slot; then, make sure
it is fully seated into the SYNC-MI module.
5. Ensure that the module’s inserter/extractor lever is fully seated.
Installing Alarm Modules
3
2
Figure 7-10. Installing PT-ALARM Module
Make sure that the electrical connections are seated correctly on insertion (see
Figure 7-10):
• A 28RU frame uses the connections labeled 1, 2, and 3:
• Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module.
• Connection 2 interconnects with the bottom fan module.
• Connection 3 interconnects with the MI module.
• A 9RU or a 15RU frame uses the connections labeled 1 and 3:
• Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module.
• A 5RU frame uses the connections labeled 2 and 3.
• Connection 2 interconnects with the fan module.
Installing Back Panel Modules

CAUTION
Properly match the back panel I/O modules with the proper
input and output modules.
One or more back panel I/O modules correspond to each input and output
module installed in an Platinum frame. Back panel I/O modules are easily
attached with two screws to the rear of the frames.
Back panel I/O modules and their corresponding input and output modules are
listed in Table 7-4 on page 258.
Table 7-4. Back Panel I/O Modules with Corresponding Input and Output
Modules
Back Panel I/O Back Panel I/O
Input Module Output Module
Module Module
PM-HS-IB PT-V-BP PM-HSR-OB PT-V-BP
PM-HS-IB+ PM-HSR-DOB*
PT-HS-IB PM-HSR-OB+
PT-HS-IB+ PT-HSR-OB
PT-HSR-DOB*
PT-HSR-OB+
PM-S-IB PT-V-BP PM-SR-OB PT-V-BP
PM-S-IB+ PM-SR-DOB*
PT-S-IB PM-SR-OB+
PT-S-IB+ PT-SR-OB
PT-SR-DOB*
PT-SR-OB+
PM-AEB-IB PT-AEB-IBP PM-AEB-OB PT-AEB-OBP
PM-AEBT-IB PM-AEBT-OB
PT-AEB-IB PT-AEB-OB
PT-AEBT-IB PT-AEBT-OB
PM-AEC-IB PT-AEC-IBP PM-AEC-OB PT-AEC-OBP
PM-AECT-IB PM-AECT-OB
PT-AEC-IB PT-AEC-OB
PT-AECT-IB PT-AECT-OB
PM-ADC-IB PT-A2-BP PM-DAC-OB PT-A2-BP
PM-ADCT-IB PM-DACT-OB
PT-ADC-IB PT-DAC-OB
PT-ADCT-IB PT-DACT-OB
PM-DEC-IB PT-V-BP PM-ENC-OB PT-V-BP
PT-DEC-IB PM-ENC-DOB*
PT-ENC-OB
PT-ENC-DOB*
PT-HS1310S-IB PT-FO-BMI PT-HSR1310S-OB PT-FO-BMO
* Requires two PT-V-BP modules
Installing Resource Modules

One resource module comes standard with every Platinum frame. You may add
an additional resource module to the frame as a redundant option. To install or
replace resource modules, follow these steps.
2. Insert the resource module into the appropriate slot from the front of the
frame. Be very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame
(Figure 7-5) and on the guide door (Figure 7-6).
3. Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the inserter/extractor lever is
fully seated.
Installing Power Supplies

One power supply module is included as standard equipment in the PM-FR-5
and PM-FR-9 Platinum frames; two power supply modules are included as
standard equipment in the PT-FR-15 Platinum frames; four power supply
modules are included as standard equipment in the PT-FR-28 Platinum frames.
Adding more power supply modules provides redundancy. No configuration
settings are needed for the power supply module(s). See “Installing a Platinum
Frame” on page 263 for information concerning the appropriate power cords to
use for AC and DC power supplies.
To install a power supply:
1. Slide the power supply into the appropriate opening in the frame. (You may
feel some resistance as the module engages the mating connector; this is
normal.) Ensure that the module is fully seated in the slot.
2. Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. The power supply voltage and
fan display lights will illuminate.
3. If you want to lock the power supply in place, push the lock screw to the
left, then tighten the lock screw.
Power distribution information is shown in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5. Platinum Power Distribution Information

Frame No. of Zones
PM-FR-5 1
PM-FR-9 1
PT-FR-15 2
PT-FR-28 4
Table 7-6. Platinum Power Distribution by Zones

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Resource module 1 Resource module 2
Sync module
OM module 1 OM module 3
OM module 2 OM module 4
Alarm module
Fan module (top) Fan module
(bottom)
TDM crosspoint TDM crosspoint
module 1 module 2
PM-5-X1
PM-5-X2
PM-9-X1
Table 7-6. Platinum Power Distribution by Zones (Continued)

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
PM-9-X2
PT-15-X1 PT-15-X3
PT-15-X2 PT-15-X4
PT-28-X1 PT-28-X3 PT-28-X5 PT-28-X7
PT-28-X2 PT-28-X4 PT-28-X6 PT-28-X8
IB: 1-128 IB: 129-256 IB: 257-384 IB: 385-512
OB: 1-128 OB: 129-256 OB: 257-384 OB: 385-512
Replacing Fans
A fan module is supplied with every Platinum frame (two fan modules are
supplied with the 28RU frame). In case of a fan failure, only individual fans will
need replacement; the entire fan module will not need to be replaced. However,
the locking 3-pin connectors must be disconnected from the fans when
removing a fan, and must be reconnected when installing a fan. On PM-FAN-5
modules, fan noise settings are adjusted via the PM-ALARM-5 module. (See
“Controlling Fan Speed” on page 35 for more information.) On PM-FAN-8,
PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16 modules, fan noise may be reduced by adjusting the
potentiometer at each fan location. This will reduce air flow through the frame.
(This is not recommended in some applications. Please contact Customer
Service for more detailed information.)
Fan replacement is shown in Figure 7-11.
Figure 7-11. Installing Fans
CAUTION
When removing a fan connection, make sure the locking
ramp of the connector is completely disengaged before
you remove the connector. Otherwise, you may damage
the fan module.
Configuration
See page 35 for fan speed and alarm configuration settings needed for
PM-FAN-5 modules. There are no configuration settings needed for
PM-FAN-8, PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16 modules.
Installing a Platinum Frame

Each Platinum frame is shipped fully populated (based on customer’s
configuration) and pre-configured from our manufacturing facility.
The Platinum system can be installed anywhere within a routing system and can
be controlled in a variety of ways. Because the flexibility of the Platinum setup
allows for many possible configurations, the installation procedures will depend
on the desired configuration and system design. General installation procedures
are outlined below.
1. Install the Platinum frame in a restricted access area, so that only qualified
personnel have access to it.
2. An optional Platinum support tray may be purchased to make installation
easier.
3. Lift the Platinum frame into place and install rack screws.
4. Use power cords of adequate wire gauge when connecting the Platinum
frame to the facility’s electrical power source.
• Platinum frames labeled to operate on 100 to 240 VAC should be
connected using AC power cords that are no smaller than 14 gauge.
• Platinum frames labeled to operate from -40 to -65 VDC should be
connected using cables no smaller than 12 gauge with ring terminals
attached to the terminal blocks.
Common Issues and Things to Check

• Verify serial port settings from card edge control (defaults are 38400, n, 8,1)
• Verify IP address settings (double-check subnet mask)
• Verify that all modules are properly seated
• Reseat modules when in doubt! Confirm that the card-edge LED for
ACT-CTL eventually turns green
• Verify that a valid X-Y signal is attached to X-Y ports on the router (not
Sync), and that a valid Sync is connected to the Sync connectors
• Verify correct termination (75Ω) on Sync and X-Y lines
• Verify state of Safe Hub mode on X-Y bus (this may be disabling second
port)
• Confirm that all power supplies are cabled, turned on, and functional
• Confirm version of Platinum firmware on the resource module
Commonly Performed Procedures

• Firmware Upgrade Procedure
• Via FTP or via flash card replacement
• May be done with router powered up
• No switching possible while PT-RES is removed, unless you have a

redundant PT-RES installed
• Flash Module Upgrade Procedure
• Attach anti-static strap
• Remove PT-RES module
• Remove flash module from PT-RES and replace with new flash
• Reinstall PT-RES
• Firmware Upgrade Procedure, crosspoint module — Replace onboard
EEPROM
• Module firmware upgrade procedure — Replace onboard EEPROM
Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum

Components
See the following sections for the procedures for field expansion and/or
replacement of Platinum components. (If a component is not listed, then it is not
field-upgradeable.If you need to upgrade or replace such a module, please
contact your Customer Service representative.)
To purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Table 7-7. Field-Upgradeable Modules and Components

Module/Component Installation Explanation Section (Page)
Alarm module • “Installing Alarm Modules” on page 257
Back panel module • “Installing Back Panel Modules” on page 258
Crosspoint module • “Installing Input and Output Modules” on page 246

• “Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint
Module Firmware” on page 241*
Fan • “Replacing Fans” on page 262
Fiber optical module • “Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for Fiber Optical Modules” on page
250
• “Laser Safety Guidelines” on page 299
Input module • “Installing Input and Output Modules” on page 246

Module Firmware” on page 241†
Output module • “Installing Input and Output Modules” on page 246

Module Firmware” on page 241‡
Output monitoring module • “Installing Output Monitoring Modules” on page 256
Table 7-7. Field-Upgradeable Modules and Components (Continued)

Module/Component Installation Explanation Section (Page)
Power supply • “Installing Power Supplies” on page 260
Resource module • “Installing Resource Modules” on page 259
Sync module • “Installing Sync Modules” on page 256
*
PM-40×32-3G5, PM-72×64-3G5, PM-64×64-3G9, PM-128×128-3G9, PT-128×256-3G15, PT-128×256-3G28 only
†
PM-HS-IB+, PM-S-IB+, PT-HS-IB+, PT-S-IB+ only
‡
PM-HSR-OB+, PM-SR-OB+, PT-HSR-OB+, PT-SR-OB+ only
Chapter 8
Configuration
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum
frame during normal operation. Disconnect all power
cords from the frame before you remove the top panel. Do
not apply power to the frame while the top is open unless
the unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel.
You can configure Platinum modules via several different methods: card-edge
controls, local and remote panels, and certain GUI-based software applications.
This chapter describes the configuration tools and procedures for configuring a
Platinum router via card-edge controls and RouterMapper configuration utility
software. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
• “Card-Edge Controls” on page 268
• “Configuration via RouterMapper” on page 276
• “Frame Controllable Parameters” on page 271
CAUTION
We recommend that you test your system before its final
installation. Make sure you verify its configuration,
cabling, and proper system operation. Observe proper
anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose
boards and servicing the equipment.
Card-Edge Controls
Using the Card-Edge Controls
Figure 8-1. Card-Edge Control Display
The card-edge controls for Platinum modules are located just behind the front
panel of the frame. The controls consist of these items, from left to right:
• Display screen
• Escape button
• Nav+ (up)/Nav- (down) toggle switch
• Enter button
Whether you use the card edge, a software control application, or a control
panel, the options and variable values on Platinum modules are known as
parameters.
Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters

The Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) screens on Platinum modules show
two types of controllable parameters:
• Read-only parameters provide status information, but cannot be changed.
• Adjustable parameters can be modified using card-edge controls.
Read-Only Parameters
Since you cannot change read-only parameters using card-edge controls, a lock
icon appears beside them on the display screen.
Adjustable Parameters
You can change two types of adjustable parameters using the card-edge
controls: numeric parameters and selectable parameters
Numeric parameter changes are always immediate. You can make selectable
parameters either Delayed or Immediate. When set to Delayed, the parameter
changes will not take effect until you press the Enter button.
Because of the small size of the card-edge display screen, only two lines of
information appear at any time. When an up or down arrow appears in the
display screen, it indicates that there are more items in the list. When both an up
and down arrow appear, there are list items both above and below the displayed
items.
Once you scroll to the end of a list, the items will wrap to the top or bottom and
begin the list over again. Wrapping is only available from the card edge.
Parameters that normally wrap when adjusted via the card edge will clip when
adjusted using a control software application.
Operation Notes
When using a Platinum module, observe the following operation notes:
• Although the effect of a parameter change may appear to be immediate, the
module requires 20 seconds to save the latest change. If another change is
made during these 20 seconds, the first parameter change and the second
parameter change will not be saved until 20 seconds after the second
parameter change. There is no limit to the number of changes that can be
made within 20 seconds of each other. However, none of these changes will
be saved until 20 seconds after the last parameter change.
• Each module automatically sets its parameters to the ones saved last.
CAUTION
Failure to observe these Operation Notes will result in
accidental changes to the module’s parameter settings.
Card-Edge Screen Saver

After 20 minutes of inactivity, the VFD on a Platinum module automatically
shuts off. To reactivate the VFD, press any button or toggle switch on the
module. The screen saver mode is a step; therefore, no parameter changes will
take effect when you “awaken” the VFD using one of the card-edge controls.
However, the parameter changes will take effect if you press the Enter button
twice while the display is being awakened.
Controllable Parameters List Appearance

The Controllable Parameters list is a multilevel structure that includes all of the
available parameters, arranged into groupings. Parameters with the abbreviation
[RO] are “read-only.”
• Platinum frame default settings are listed on page 271.
• Platinum application parameters are listed on page 271.
• Platinum fail-safe parameters are listed on page 273.
• Parameters lists for each individual module are listed with the module’s
detailed description.
Navigating the Parameters List
Note
If you do not wish to make changes to your settings, return to the
previously selected item in the list, and then press Escape to move up a
level.
To navigate, then view or change a parameter, follow these steps:

1. Open the front panel of the frame.
2. Press any card edge control button or the toggle switch to turn on the VFD
display. The module name will appear as the banner on the card-edge
display screen.
3. Press the Select button.
The first two items in the Level One list will appear.
4. Click Nav- (down) on the Nav-/Nav+ switch to view more items in the list.
5. Choose the desired item in the list, then press the Select button.
The Level Two list will appear.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to view more items in Levels Two, Three, and Four.
7. If the parameter is numeric, slide the bar to the desired parameter using the
Nav+/Nav- switch.
OR
Choose the desired item in the Level Four list, then press the Select button.
8. Once you have set or viewed the parameter, you can leave it in its current
state or return to the card-edge display banner.
To return to the card-edge display banner, repeatedly press the Escape
button.
9. Close the front panel of the frame to ensure the cooling system continues to
operate properly.
Frame Controllable Parameters

The card-edge controllable parameters listed below are specific to a Platinum
frame. Frame controllable parameters available through RouterMapper are
showin in Table 8-4 on page 277. Controllable parameters specific to a
particular module are listed with the module’s detailed description.
Default Settings
Table 8-1. Platinum Default Settings
Item Default Setting
IP address 192.168.100.250
Gateway 192.168.100.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Serial baud rate 38400 baud
Serial mode RS-232
Telnet Off
FTP On
VXY Server On
# of users= 4
Application Parameters
Table 8-2. Card-Edge Application Parameters
Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 Description
COMMS SERIAL (Serial 1 and Serial 2) Allows viewing and control of settings
affecting serial ports 1 and 2
SUMMARY Displays a summary of the selected serial
port’s settings (mode, baud)
MODE Chooses either RS-232 or RS-422 mode
for the selected serial port
BAUD Chooses baud rate for the selected serial
port; available settings are 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, and 115200
ENET (Enet 1 and Enet 2) Allows viewing and control of settings
affecting Ethernet ports 1 and 2
SUMMARY Displays a summary of the selected
Ethernet port’s Address, gateway and
Netmask settings
ADDRESS Allows setting the Ethernet port’s IP
address
Table 8-2. Card-Edge Application Parameters (Continued)

Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 Description
GATEWAY Allows setting the Ethernet port’s Default
Gateway address
NETMASK Allows setting the Ethernet ports network
mask
STATUS FAN Indicates if there is an active fan alarm in
the system
PSU Indicates if there is an active Power supply
unit alarm in the system
OPERATIONS SERVICE SNAPSHOT Causes an updated copy of the system
snapshot file to be written to the flash file
system
SYSTEM FRAME ID Allows assignment of the frame’s system
ID
REBOOT NORMAL Restarts the Platinum system normally
FAILSAFE Restarts the system in Failsafe mode
(normally used only during installation
and/or by service personnel for low-level
diagnostics, system settings or upgrading
resource card components)
DEFAULTS Restores resource card communications
and operation settings to factory default
state
Fail-Safe Parameters
Fail-safe parameters are normally used only during installation and/or by
service personnel for low-level diagnostics, system settings, or upgrading
resource card components.
Table 8-3. Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters

Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 User Range / Results
Communications Network1 Network 1 Up/Down
IP Address (displayed on XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
second line: current (Default IP address: 192.168.100.250)
status)
Gateway (displayed on XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
second line: current (Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1)
status)
Subnet Mask (displayed XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
on second line: current (Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0)
status)
Enable
Disable
Network 2 Network 2 Up/Down
IP Address XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default IP address: 192.168.100.250
line: current status)
Gateway XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1
Subnet Mask XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
(Displayed on second Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Enable
Disable
Serial 1 Status Display Serial Info
Baud Rate • 9600
(Scroll on second line: • 19200
Parity = None • 38400
Number of Stop Bits = 1 • 57600
Number of Bits=8 • 115200
Mode • RS232
• RS422
Enable
Disable
Table 8-3. Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued)

Serial 2 Enable/Disable
(displayed on second
line: current status -
enabled or disabled Baud Rate • 9600
(Scroll on second line: • 19200
Parity = None • 38400
Number of Stop Bits = 1 • 57600
Number of Bits=8 • 115200
Mode • RS232
• RS422
USB 1 Enable/Disable
USB 2 Host/Filesystem
Protocols Ftp FTP Enable/Disable Selection
Telnet1 # of connections (displayed on second
line: current status
Port number (displayed on second line:
current status)
Telnet2 Telnet -Enable/Disable Selection
# of connections
Port number
File System List Directory tree
Format Fs Format Files system
Detect Fs Mount File system
Erase Fs Delete File System
Delete Delete Files
Diagnostics Ping Option Ping XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
HW Test Perform hardware test
Memory Test Perform memory test
Flash Test Perform flash test
Restore Defaults Reset Frame to Factory Define items affected to default:
Defaults Y/N? Comm Setting
IP
gateway
subnet
ftp = on
telnet = on
Any Files- like sysconfig.xml?
Table 8-3. Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued)

Boot From Network1 Find matching files from IP address
XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Network 2 Find matching files from IP address

XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Flash
Card 1
Card 2
Time/Clock Time server to connect Displays current time/date scroll on
to bottom
Set Time Enter Time

Set Mode Synchronize with NTP
Set Time Server IP Address of Server
XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Set Timezone GMT ± etc.
Server Connection
Timeout (ms)
About Product name
Software Versions
HW Version
Copyright Leitch Inc
Serial Number
International Services
Update Update Rom
Update App
Create Im
Reboot Reboot System Safe
Mode Y/N?
Configuration via RouterMapper

Note
This section presupposes that you have a working knowledge of
RouterMapper and have used its other capabilities. If not, please refer to
the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide to familiarize
yourself with its functions before you continue the Add process.
The information below provides you the different methods by which you can
add the Platinum router to a RouterMapper database. It does not go into detail
about any of these methods or about other aspects of editing a router. For more
information on editing routers in RouterMapper, please refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide, edition N or higher. You
can download a copy of the most current edition from our website. At the
Documentation page, select RouterMapper from the Product Name drop-down
list box, and then click on the appropriate file link. Follow the on-screen
directions to either open the file or download it to your desktop.
To add a Platinum router, you must use RouterMapper v.6.01 or higher (v.6.03
or higher to add Platinum with CENTRIO). You can download a copy of the
most current version of RouterMapper configuration utility software from our
website. At the Download page, select RouterMapper from the Request Files
For drop-down list box, and then click on the appropriate EXE file to start the
download.
Adding Platinum Frames by Polling

The Poll option is used to query the control system for any programmable
devices that may be present in the system. Polling will obtain information about
the current configuration of each physical device, and will compare it to the
information found in the database to determine if the database information
matches the actual configuration. For more information about this process, see
“Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 88 of the RouterMapper Configuration
Utility Reference Guide.
Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering

The Discovery option is a quick way to allow RouterMapper to search the
control system for any programmable devices that may be present in the system.
Unlike the Polling option, the Discovery option will not obtain information
about current configurations; however, it will allow you to select discovered
devices to add to the device list. You can then use RouterMapper’s Edit
capabilities to configure the device. For more information about this process,
see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 88 of the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
Adding Platinum Frames using the Add Command

An alternative to polling the system for, or discovering, devices is to create the
device definitions via RouterMapper’s Add function. Adding a Platinum frame
to the RouterMapper database is a multi-step process that requires you to select
a frame size, set up a matrix, select monitoring (if you have optional monitoring
modules as part of your system), and set up controls. For more information
about this process, see “Adding Platinum Frames” on page 90 of the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
Frame Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper

Whenever a system poll is initiated, RouterMapper will query all devices
attached to the system to determine the configuration of each. The properties of
the detected frame will be displayed on the Detected Matrices tab. This
information is read-only (it cannot be edited). However, certain application
parameters can be edited via the Module Parameters list box for frames. To
access this list box, at the Detected Matrices tab, position the screen cursor
above the resource module entry in the Control Components section, right-click
the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings. The Module Parameters
list box will appear.
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable.
Selections that are greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. Table 8-4
lists frame parameters, descriptions, and user ranges.
Table 8-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)

Frame Type [RO] Programmed frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO] Actual, physical frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Frame Id Number assigned to frame from • 0 - 127
RouterMapper to allow it to
participate in the control system
Frame Name Alphanumeric string used in • 23 characters
RouterMapper to allow user-friendly
naming of the Platinum frame; it
shows in the hardware list of
RouterMapper
CPU Id [RO] PT-RES serial number; allows • 12 characters
licensing for optional features such as
SNMP
Table 8-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper (Continued)


Sync Mode1 Specifies sync settings for sync ports • Auto
• (see the RouterMapper Configuration • Standard
• Utility Reference Guide for • Advanced
Sync Mode4 descriptions of these sync mode
settings)
Sync Reference1 Only used if sync mode is “Standard” • None*
• (see the RouterMapper Configuration • 1280×720/50P Line 7
• Utility Reference Guide for a • 1280×720/60P Line 7
Sync Reference4 description of this sync mode setting) • 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/25P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/50I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60 Line 10
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Detected Reference1 [RO] Sync reference that is automatically • None*
• detected by PT-RES (this is the sync • 1280×720/50P Line 7
• reference used when Sync Mode • 1280×720/60P Line 7
Detected Reference4 [RO] parameter is set to Auto) • 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
Four concurrent available sync • 1920×1080/24P Line 7
references are allowed • 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
If an external sync reference is • 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
removed from the frame, the Sync • 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
Presence parameter will indicate that • 1920×1080/25P Line 7
it is not present; however, the • 1920×1080/30P Line 7
Detected Reference parameter will • 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
continue to show the previous • 1920×1080/50I Line 7
detected reference to prevent • 1920×1080/60I Line 7
interruption in switching operations • 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10


Redundancy Mode Instructs PT-RES to automatically • Manual
switch crosspoints from a crosspoint • Auto
module to its redundant crosspoint
module when the active one is
removed
This feature is not available for frames
that do not have redundant crosspoint
modules; when set to Manual, you
must switch each crosspoint to the
redundant card by setting it to Active
by using the crosspoint active
parameter
Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all • Switch All
currently active crosspoints to the
redundant crosspoint module when the
active one is removed
External Temperature [RO] Specifies external operating –128° to 120°C
temperature in degrees Celsius
General Alarm1 [RO] Alarm relay on PT-RES • No Alarm
• • Alarm
•
General Alarm3 [RO]
Alarm Enable1 Enables/disables General Alarm • Enable
• parameter • Disable
•
Alarm Enable3
Active Crosspoint1 For frames that support redundant • On
• crosspoints, this parameter allows you • Off
• to set the currently active crosspoint
Active Crosspoint8 module
If Redundant Switch Mode is set to
Switch All” all active crosspoints will
switch through the set crosspoint
module and the corresponding,
previous active crosspoint module will
become inactive
For all frames the value of this
parameter indicates whether the
crosspoint module installed is active
(present and allowing switched)
Sync Enable1 Allows you to select which sync • On
• references can trigger crosspoint • Off
• switches
Sync Enable4


Sync Presence1 Indicates which sync reference is • On
• presently detected by PT-RES • Off
• If an external sync reference is
Sync Presence4 removed from the frame, the Sync
Presence parameter will indicate that
it is not present; however, the
Detected Reference parameter will
continue to show the previous
detected reference to prevent
interruption in switching operations
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Allows you to set the currently active • On
•Active TDM Crosspoint2 TDM module • Off
Active Sync Module1 Allows you to set the currently active • On

• sync module • Off
•
Active Sync Module2
Internal Network1 Used with CENTRIO, sets the • 192.168.101.000*
• network address for internal Ethernet
• for each bank of CENTRIO modules
Internal Network4 This feature is not available for frames
that do not have CENTRIO modules
installed
Double Density Mode Used when a CENTRIO double • 7+1
density submodule is installed on a • 8+1
Platinum IB+ module • None*
This feature is not available for frames
that do not have CENTRIO modules
installed
Temperature Threshold Indicates the temperature threshold for 60°C* (-127° to +127°C)
all the temperature sensors in/on a
Platinum frame
When a change in any external or
internal temperature sensor readings
rises to the same value or greater than
the temperature threshold value, the
frame generates an alarm on the
PT-Alarm module
When a change in any external or
internal temperature sensor value
results in all temperature values drop
to less than the temperature threshold,
the alarm indicator will be cleared
Chapter 9
Terminal Operation
Overview
A separate serial control port is used to control a Platinum router from an
external computer or automation system. The serial port may be used to monitor
the system matrix configuration, determine the current status of crosspoint
connections, change crosspoint connections in any matrix, and setup
pre-programmed crosspoint takes sequences, or salvos. These (and other)
operations are assigned to the serial port via a series of commands called
“terminal operation” commands. You can find a list of the terminal commands
available for the Platinum router starting on page 284.
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session

Before you configure your Platinum product, you will need to initiate a terminal
operation session. You need to determine which type of setup you will use:
• For a standalone or network system with serial connections, see
“Establishing a Terminal Operation Session for Serial Control Interface
Products” on page 282.
• For a standalone or network system with Ethernet connections, see
“Establishing a Telnet Session for Ethernet Control Interface Products” on
page 283.
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session for

Serial Control Interface Products
1. Configure a host machine (such as a PC with HyperTerminal1 installed) for
serial port communication at a baud rate of 38400 with these settings: Data
on the serial control port is encoded as 8N1:
• 8
• None
• 1
• No flow-control
2. Connect a null modem serial cable from a PC serial port to the serial port on
the back of the Platinum frame.
3. Connect the X-Y to the router network.
CAUTION
Make sure the X-Y network is terminated appropriately.
4. Start up both PC and terminal emulation application.

5. Apply power to the Platinum frame.
6. At the host machine keyboard, enter the letter “Q.” The Command
Summary screen should appear on the PC screen.
1
HyperTerminal, a product of Hilgraeve Inc., is a communications applet that ships with Win-
dows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0.
Establishing a Telnet Session for Ethernet Control

Interface Products
Follow these steps to establish a Telnet session to the Platinum frame if the
Telnet application is resident on a PC:
1. Connect an Ethernet crossover cable between the 10Base-T connector on a
PC to the 10Base-T connector on the Platinum frame.
2. Change the IP address of your PC to a static IP address compatible with the
Platinum IP address.
Note
Invoking Telnet commands requires a valid username and password. The
default username is leitch and the default password is leitchadmin.
3. At a DOS prompt, enter the word “telnet” and the IP address of the
Platinum frame (e.g., telnet 100.200.50.10).
4. Press <Enter>. The Telnet screen will appear.
5. Enter your login, then press <Enter>.
6. Enter your password, then press <Enter>.
7. The startup screen and the message “Type Q for menu...” will appear.
8. Type in the letter “Q” (it will not appear on the screen), then press <Enter>.
The Command Summary screen will appear.
Once a Telnet session is established, you will have access via the Telnet
interface to the commands listed in this section.
Protocol Support for Platinum Routers

Table 9-1. Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands
Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
BUFFER BUFFER [#] [OFF|CLEAR] # = Buffer number Depending on the input
or F = Off parameter:
B [#] [F|C] C = Clear • Causes a salvo buffer to be
selected and automatically
sets the Buffer mode ON
• Turns buffer OFF;
subsequent crosspoint
connection requests will be
taken at the end of command
line processing
• Clears the contents of a salvo
buffer
CLEAR CLEAR # [,#,#,...#] # = Destination numbers Cancels crosspoint or clears
or in currently selected level crosspoint request
C # [,#,#,...#]
DESTINATION DESTINATION #[,#,...] # = Destination number Completes crosspoint
or operations after the level
D# number and the source number
have been set
INFORMATION INFORMATION None Provides information on the
or overall system as seen from the
I connection to the X-Y bus
LEVEL LEVEL # #=Level number Sets the level number for a
or router that is connected to an
L# active system
POLL POLL # #=Source number to be Determines which destinations
or searched; may be any are connected to a specific
P# number 1 to 12 source number
QUERY QUERY None Provides a list that includes a
or basic command syntax and brief
Q description of each command
Table 9-1. Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands (Continued)

Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
READ READ None Lists all crosspoints within a
or frame in order by level
R numbers, then by destination
numbers that show which
source is assigned to each of the
destinations on that level
Each crosspoint connection is
represented by a numeric pair
separated by a semicolon and a
space: the first number is the
destination number; the second
number is the source number
that is connected to that
destination
SOURCE SOURCE # # = Source number; can Sets the desired source number
or range from 1 to the
S# maximum number of
sources on that level, or
“X” for disconnect
TERMINAL TERMINAL [ON|OFF] ON = Turns on Echo • When ECHO mode is ON,
or mode all the characters sent are
T[/F] OFF = Turns off Echo “echoed” to the terminal
mode • When ECHO mode is OFF,
messages sent are not
“echoed” to the terminal
VERIFY VERIFY # # = desired salvo buffer Shows current crosspoint
or number (ranges from 1 to requests stored in a particular
V# the maximum number of salvo buffer
buffers available)
XPOINT XPOINT [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] [#L:]= Level number The crosspoint is executed (you
(combines operations or [#S] = Source number can use a READ command to
of the LEVEL, X [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] [#D,...] = Destination confirm the crosspoint
SOURCE, and number connection)
DESTINATION
commands into one
command; and allows
multiple crosspoint
connection requests in
one command)
ZERO ZERO None The device is restarted and
or status is cleared
Z
Appendix A
Safety Precautions, Certifications, and
Compliances
Consignes de sécurité, certifications, et
conformités
Overview
Généralités
Carefully observe the safety alert symbols below for dangers, warnings, and
cautions. They alert installers and operators of possible dangers or important
information contained in this manual.
Obervez précautionneusement les symboles de sécurité ci-après
indiquant des dangers, des avertissements, et des précautions. Ils
alertent les installateurs et opérateurs des possibles dangers ou des
importantes informations contenues dans ce manuel.
Keep in mind, though, that warnings alone do not eliminate hazards, nor are
they a substitute for safe operating techniques and proper accident prevention
measures.
Gardez à l'esprit cependant que ces avertissements à eux seuls
n'éliminent pas les risques et ne sont pas un remplacement aux
techniques d'utilisation sécuritaire et aux mesures de prévention des
accidents.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
The Platinum should be installed in a restricted access area, so that only
qualified personnel have access to it.
IMPORTANT! Seulement un personnel qualifié devrait effectuer les
procédures de remplacement.
Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

Termes de sécurité et symboles utilisés dans ce
manuel
WARNING
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may
result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is
present.
Message identifiant des conditions ou opérations qui

peuvent résulter en des blessures corporelles ou la perte
de la vie. Une haute tension est présente.
CAUTION
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can
result in damage to the equipment or other property.
Message identifiant des conditions ou opérations qui

peuvent résulter en des dommages à l'appareil ou aux
installations.
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product

Termes de sécurité et symboles sur l'appareil
DANGER: High voltage and indicates a personal injury hazard
immediately accessible as one reads the marking.
DANGER: Haute tension et indique un risque de blesssures corporelles
immédiatement accessible dès qu'une personne lit ce symbole.
WARNING: Indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately
accessible as one reads the marking.
AVERTISSEMENT: Indique un risque de blesssures corporelles qui n'est
pas immédiatement accessible dès qu'une personne lit ce symbole.
CAUTION: Indicates a hazard to property, including the product, or to
pay attention and refer to the manual.
ATTENTION: Indique un risque aux installations, incluant l'appareil, ou
de faire attention et de se referer au manuel.
Protective ground (earth) terminal.
Borne de terre de protection
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

Prévention des décharges électro-statiques
Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
Prendre des précautions durant la manipulation d'appareils sensibles aux
charges électro-statiques.
CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components in the
product. To prevent ESD, observe these precautions when directed to do so:
ATTENTION: Les décharges électro-statiques peuvent endommager les
composants de l'appareil. Pour prévenir ces décharges, observez ces
précautions lorsque le manuel le demande
1. Use a Ground Strap. Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the
static voltage from your body while installing or removing sensitive
components.
1. Utiliser une connection de mise à la terre. Porter un bracelet
anti-statique connecté à une borne de mise à la terre pour décharger la
tension électro-statique de votre corps durant l'installation ou
l'enlèvement des composants sensibles.
2. Use a Safe Work Area. Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding
a static charge in the work area where you install or remove sensitive
components. Avoid handling sensitive components in areas that have a floor or
benchtop surface capable of generating a static charge.
2. Utiliser une zone de travail sécuritaire. N'utiliser aucun appareil capable de
générer ou retenir une charge statique dans la zone de travail où vous installez
ou remplacez des composants sensibles
3. Handle Components Carefully. Do not slide sensitive components over any
surface. Do not touch exposed connector pins. Handle sensitive components as
little as possible.
3. Manipuler les composants avec précautions. Ne pas glisser des composants
sensibles sur aucune surface. Ne pas toucher les contacts des connecteurs qui
sont exposés. Manipuler les composants sensibles le moins souvent possible.
4. Transport and Store Carefully. Transport and store sensitive components in a
static-protected bag or container.
4. Transporter et ranger avec précautions. Transporter et ranger les composants
sensibles dans un sac anti-statique ou une boîte.
Injury Precautions
Précautions contre les risques de blessures
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the frame during normal
operation. The AC power cord must be disconnected from the frame before
the top panel is removed. (In frames with multiple power supplies, remove
ALL power cords.) Power should not be applied to the frame while the top
is open unless properly trained personnel are servicing the unit.
Pull out the plug(s) from the main socket before the removal of a cover.
AVERTISSEMENT
Des tensions mortelles peuvent être présentes à l'intérieur d'un chassis
durant son utilisation normale. Le cordon d'alimentation doit être déconnecté
du chassis avant d'enlever le panneau supérieur. Dans les chassis ayant
des alimentations multiples, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation. Le
chassis ne devrait pas être sous tension lorsque le panneau supérieur est
enlevé, sauf si un personnel qualifié est en train de faire l'entretien de l'unité.
Retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise située sur le chassis avant
d'enlever un panneau de protection.
Przod zdjeciem pokrywy wyciagnac wtyczke z gniazda sieciowego.
WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - DO NOT OPEN.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE - NE PAS
OUVRIR.
INSTALLER SUR SUPPORT DE MONTAGE SEULEMENT (BAIE DE
MONTAGE).
Use proper power cord
Utiliser un cordon d'alimentation convenable
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.
Afin d'éviter les risques d'incendie, utiliser seulement le cordon
d'alimentation spécifié pour cet appareil.
Do Not Operate Without Covers
Ne pas utiliser sans les panneaux de protection
To avoid electrical shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with
covers or panels removed.
Pour éviter les risques de choc électrique ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil avec les panneaux de protection enlevés.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions
Ne pas utiliser dans des conditions humides
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil dans des conditions humides.
Ground the product

Connecter l'appareil à la terre
This is a Safety Class 1 product and is electrically grounded through the
grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, the
grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making
connections to the product’s input or output terminals, ensure the product
is properly grounded.
Cet appareil appartient à la classe 1 des normes de sécurité Il est relié à la
terre au moyen du conducteur de mise à la terre faisant partie du cordon
d'alimentation. Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, le connecteur de
mise à la terre doit être relié à une borne de terre. Avant de faire les
connections aux connecteurs d'entrées et de sorties, s'assurer que l'appareil
est correctement relié à la terre.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE GROUNDED.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
AVERTISSEMENT: CET APPAREIL DOIT RELIE A LA TERRE.
VARNING: APPARATEN SKALL ANSLUTAS TILL JORDAT
UTTAG NÄR DEN ANSLUTS TILL ETT NÄTVERK.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
Ne pas utiliser dans une atmostphère explosive
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive
atmosphere.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil dans une atmosphère explosive.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry
Eviter les circuits exposés
To avoid injury, remove jewelry such as rings, watches, and other metallic
objects. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is
present.
Pour éviter les risques de blessures, enlever les bijoux tels qu'anneaux,
montres, et autres objets métalliques. Ne pas toucher les composants et
connections exposées lorsque l'alimentation est présente.
Product Damage Precautions

Précautions pour éviter les dommages à l'appareil
Use Proper Power Source
Utiliser une source d'alimentation appropriée
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than
the specified voltage.
Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un
voltage supérieur à celui requis.
Provide Proper Ventilation
Fournir une correcte ventilation
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
Pour prévenir une surchauffe de cet appareil, fournir une correcte
ventilation.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures
Ne pas utiliser un appareil défectueux
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified
service personnel.
Si vous suspectez que cet appareil est endommagé, faites-le inspecter par
un personnel d'entretien qualifié.
CAUTION: This unit can have more than one power supply cord. To
de-energize the internal circuitry, you have to disconnect all power cords.
ATTENTION: Cette unité peut avoir plus d'un cordon d'alimentation. Pour
enlever toute source de voltage sur les circuits internes, vous devez enlever
tous les cordons d'alimentation.
ADVARSEL: Utstyret kan ha mere ennn en tilførselsledning. For å gjore
interne deler spennigsløse må alle tilførselsledningene trekkes ut.
VARNING: Denna apparat har mer än en nätanslutning. Samtliga nätkablar
måste bortkopplas för att göra de interna kretsarna spänningsfria.
FUSE: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.
FUSIBLE: REMPLACER AVEC LE MEME TYPE ET CALIBRE DE
FUSIBLE.
CAUTION: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE FUSE.
ATTENTION: UTILISER UN FUSIBLE DE RECHANGE DE MÊME TYPE.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT SUPPLY CORD BEFORE CHANGING FUSE.
ATTENTION: DÉBRANCHER AVANT DE REMPLACER LE FUSIBLE.
ACHTUNG: VOR AUSWECHSELN DER SICHERUNG IST DAS GERÄT
VOM NETZ ZU TRENNEN.
Use Proper Power Source
Utiliser une source d'alimentation appropriée
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than
the specified voltage.
Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un
voltage supérieur à celui requis.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This equipment has more than one power supply cord. To reduce the risk of
electric shock, disconnect all power cords before servicing.
Cet appareil possede plus d'un cordon d'alimentation Afin de reduire les
risques de chocs electriques, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation avant
de faire l'entretien.
EMC and Safety Standards

Normes de sécurité et de compliance
électro-magnétique (EMC)
This product has been tested and found to comply with the following
IEC, FCC, UL, ICES, and CSA standards, per the provision of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 as
amended by 92/31EEC of 28 April 1992 and 93/68/EEC, Article 5 of 22
July 1993, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February
1973.
Cet appareil a été vérifié et trouvé conforme avec les normes CEI, FCC,
UL, NMB, et CSA, et les dispositions de la Directive sur la compatibilité
électro-magnétique 89/336/EEC du 3 Mai 1989 et de ses amendements
92/31/EEC du 28 avril 1992 et 93/68/EEC, article 5, du 22 juillet 1993, et
la Directive sur les basses tensions 73/23/EEC du 19 février 1973.
These devices are for professional use only and comply with Part 15 of
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. These devices may cause interference to radio and TV receivers in
residential areas.
2. These devices will accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operations.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Harris Corporation,
the party responsible for compliance to the FCC Part 15 Rule, could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment legally in the United States.
These devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
from digital apparatus as set out in the interference standard entitled
“Digital apparatus,” ICES-003, from Industry Canada.
Cet appareil est pour usage professionnel seulement et est conforme
avec la Partie 15 des réglements de la FCC. Son utilisation est sujette
aux deux conditions suivantes
1. Cet appareil peut causer des interférences aux récepteurs radio et
TV situés dans des zones résidentielles.
2. Cet appareil acceptera toute interférence reçue, incluant les
interférences qui peuvent affecter son utilisation.
Les remplacements ou modifications qui ne sont pas approuvées par
Harris CorporationMC, la compagnie responsable pour la conformité
avec la Partie 15 des réglements de la FCC, peuvent annuler
l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à utiliser cet appareil légalement aux
Etats-Unis.
Cet appareil n'excède pas les limites de la Classe A pour les
perturbations radio-électriques
provenant d'appareils numériques telles que décrites dans la Norme sur

le Matériel Brouilleur NMB-003, intitulée "Appareils numériques" et
publiée par Industrie Canada.
Additional EMC Information

Compatibilité électro-magnétique (CEM) - Information
additionnelle
This device is for professional use in a controlled EMC environment, such as
purpose-built broadcast studios.
Cet appareil est conçu pour un usage professionnel dans un
environnement rencontrant les normes de CEM, tel que des studios de
diffusion spécialement construits à cet effet.
EMC regulations require that the radiation emitted from this unit does not
exceed certain limits. These limits are only met when the front panel is closed
and secured.
Les réglements concernant la CEM exigent que les radiations émises à
partir de cette unité n'excèdent pas certaines limites. Ces limites sont
seulement rencontrées lorsque le panneau frontal est fermé et les deux
écrous de fixation serrés.
Compliance to the EMC regulations is also dependent on the use of suitably
shielded (screened) cables. Coax cables should be of the double-shielded
(screened) variety. Unused BNCs should be fitted with 75Ω terminations.
La conformité avec les réglements de CEM depend aussi de l'utilisation
de câbles convenablement blindés. Les câbles coaxiaux devraient avoir
un double blindage. Les connecteurs BNC non utilisés devraient être
terminés avec une charge de 75 Ohms.
All audio cables should be screened with the shield (screen) making good
contact with the metallic parts of the cable connectors.
Tous les câbles audio devraient être blindés avec le blindage ayant un
bon contact avec les parties métalliques du connecteur utilisé pour ces
câbles.
D-type connectors used with this unit should always have metallic shells with
the shield (screen) of the cable mechanically bonded to the metal shell. It is
further recommended that the D-type cable connectors be of the “dimple”
variety. These connectors make a better contact and consequently improve EMC
performance.
Les connecteurs de type D utilisés avec cette unité devraient toujours
avoir des coquilles métalliques et le blindage du câble attaché
mécaniquement à la coquille métallique. Il est de plus recommandé que
ces connecteurs de type D soient d'une variété "avec empreinte". Ces
connecteurs permettent un meilleur contact et ceci améliore la
performance de la CEM.
Table A-1. Harmonized and Reference IEC Safety and EMC Standards
Harmonized Reference IEC
Description
Standard Standard
UL 60950-1/ IEC 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment for North
CSA-C22.2 America and Canada, with Certified Body (CB) Report with
all country deviations
EN55103-1, 2 EN55103-1, 2 FCC Part 15 regulations and European EMC standards for
application of the CE Mark
Appendix B
Laser Safety Guidelines
General Laser Information

WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than
those specified in this document may result in hazardous
laser radiation exposure.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar
operating systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR)
light at wavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600
nanometers. The emitted light is above the red end of the visible spectrum,
which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although radiant energy at
near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can see the
shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude
below any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.
Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. (The
term “monochromaticity” means a single wavelength output of pure color that
may be visible or invisible to the eye.) A conventional laser produces a
small-sized beam of light, and because the beam size is small the power density
(also called “irradiance”) is very high. Consequently, for their safe operation,
lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state (USA)
regulations, as well as international standards.
A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very
well “collimated”; thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively
constant over distance. Lasers used in lightwave systems, however, have a large
beam divergence, which is typically 10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the
inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces the irradiance by a factor of
4) and rapidly decreases over distance.
Lasers and Eye Damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400-1400
nm range may cause eye damage. When a beam of light enters the eye, the eye
magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The
irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 or 100,000
times more than at the cornea and, if sufficiently intense, may burn the retina.
The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber
telecommunications is thermal in origin, i.e., damage caused by heating. A
specific amount of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal
tissue. Damage to the retina occurs only when you look at the light sufficiently
long that the product of the retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the
damage threshold. Optical energies above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin
burns but do not affect the retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths
greater than 1400 nm are significantly higher than for wavelengths in the retinal
hazard region
Classification of Lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by the Food
and Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to
certify each laser or laser product as belonging to one of four major Classes: I,
II, IIa, IIIa, IIIb, or IV.
The International Electro-Technical Commission is an international standards
body that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes
are similar with Classes divided into Classes 1, 2, 3A, 3B, and 4.
Lasers are classified according to the accessible emission limits and their
potential for causing injury. Optical fiber telecommunication systems are
generally classified as Class I/1 because, under normal operating conditions, all
energized laser transmitting modules are terminated on optical fibers which
enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming a protective housing.
Also, a protective housing / access panel is typically installed in front of the laser
modules frames. The modules themselves, however, may be FDA/CDRH Class
I or IIIb; or IEC Class 1, 3A, or 3B.
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber

Communication Systems
In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber communication system is totally
enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the
FDA and IEC classifications. The fiber optic cables that interconnect various
components of an optical fiber can disconnect or break, and may expose people
to laser emissions. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may
expose the technician to emission from the semiconductor laser during
installation and servicing.
Unlike more familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the
emission pattern of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In
a divergent beam, the irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with
distance. The greater the distance, the less energy will enter the eye, and the less
potential risk for eye injury.
Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided
eye at distances greater than 5 to 6 in. (127 to 152 mm) normally will not cause
eye injury, provided that the power in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at
the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths.
Laser Safety
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than
those specified in this document may result in hazardous
laser radiation exposure.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems use semiconductor laser transmitters

that emit infrared light that is normally not visible to the human eye. Although a
conventional laser produces a small beam of light, the power density is very
high, and it can damage your eyes.
If a beam of laser light enters the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the energy
on the retina. The energy that reaches the retina can be as much as 100,000
times more than at the cornea and, as a result, it can burn the retina.
Laser transmission products are classified in four major groups (Class 1, 2, 3,
and 4), according to their emissions and potential for causing injury. Fiber optic
transmitter modules in this series are designated Class 1.
Precautions for Enclosed Systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems
are completely enclosed; nonetheless, observe the following precautions:
1. Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into
optical connectors or broken fibers.
2. Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by a
technician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course.
3. Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an
optical instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye
damage, appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in close proximity to
the optical port on the protective housing / access panel of the terminal
equipment.
WARNING
Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a
microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to
stare at the energized fiber end.
Precautions for Unenclosed Systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication
system is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these
practices:
CAUTION
Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to
do service, maintenance, and restoration.
1. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical

connectors at close distances.
Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser circuit packs are
typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port shutters,
Automatic Power Reduction (APR), and Automatic Power Shut Down
(APSD) are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions.
However, technicians removing or replacing laser modules should not stare
or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying
lenses. (Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such as
Find-R-Scopes are not considered magnifying lenses or optical
instruments).
2. Ensure that only authorized, trained personnel use optical test equipment
during installation or servicing.
3. Turn off all laser sources before scanning a fiber with an optical test set.
4. Keep all unauthorized personnel away from the immediate area of the
optical fiber systems during installation and service.
For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber communication systems in the
workplace, consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of
Lasers in the U.S. or outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2.
Labels
The Class 1 Laser Products label (see Figure B-1) is applicable to Class 1 laser
products.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001
CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
Figure B-1. Label for Class 1 Laser Products
The Class 1M Laser Radiation label (see Figure B-2) is applicable to Class 1M
laser products.
CAUTION: LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
CAUTION: CLASS 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.
(magnifiers)
Figure B-2. Label for Class 1M Laser Radiation
Specifications
PT-FO-IB Modules
See page 136 for a list of optical specifications for PM-FO-IB and PT-FO-IB
laser input modules.
PT-FO-OB Modules
See page 208 for a list of optical specifications for PM-FO-OB AND PT-FO-OB
laser output modules.
Index
Keywords
A output monitoring module basic signal flow 234

PM-128×128-3G9 212
Adding frames
PM-128×128-X9 212
Add command 277
PM-40×32-3G5 213
discovering 276
PM-64×64-3G9 212
polling 276
PM-64×64-X9 212
Alarm module. See PM-ALARM-5; PT-ALARM
PM-72×64-3G5 213
Application parameters
PM-ADC-IB 116
frame 271–272
PM-ADCT-IB 127
RouterMapper 277–280
PM-AEB-IB 90
Architecture
PM-AEB-OB 168
frame sizes 4
PM-AEBT-IB 98
matrix sizes 4
PM-AEBT-OB 177
output monitoring
PM-AEC-IB 90
5RU 230
PM-AEC-OB 168
9RU 231
PM-AECT-IB 98
15RU 232
PM-AECT-OB 177
28RU 233
PM-ATDM16-X9 228
physical 5–7
PM-ATDM9-X5 228
PM-DAC-OB 191
B
PM-DATC-OB 199
B# command. See BUFFER command PM-DEC-IB 108
Back panel modules PM-ENC-DOB 186
descriptions 17 PM-ENC-OB 186
installation 258 PM-HS-IB 71
PT-A2-BP 17, 111, 112, 121, 123, 189, 196, 258 PM-HS-IB+ 76
PT-AEB-IBP 17, 88, 95, 258 PM-HSR-DOB 146
PT-AEB-OBP 17, 165, 173, 258 PM-HSR-OB 146
PT-AEC-BOC 17, 88, 95 PM-HSR-OB+ 152
PT-AEC-IBP 17, 88, 95, 258 PM-S-IB 80
PT-AEC-OBP 17, 165, 173, 258 PM-S-IB+ 85
PT-AECT-IBP 17 PM-SR-DOB 157
PT-AECT-OBP 17 PM-SR-OB 157
PT-FO-BMI 17, 133, 258 PM-SR-OB+ 162
PT-FO-BMO 17, 205, 258 PT-128×256-3G15 212
PT-V-BP 17, 69, 73, 78, 82, 105, 144, 149, 155, 160, PT-128×256-3G28 212
183, 258 PT-128×256-X15 212
Block diagrams PT-128×256-X28 212
crosspoint modules basic signal flow 212, 213 PT-ADC-IB 116
output module basic signal flow 141 PT-ADCT-IB 127
Index
PT-AEB-IB 90, 98 frames 11, 28, 29–32, 33–34, 35–40, 41–45, 46–48,
PT-AEB-OB 168 49–50, 51–52, 53–54
PT-AEBT-IB 98 modules 12–17
PT-AEC-IB 90, 98 replacing 264
PT-AEC-OB 168 Configuration
PT-AECT-IB 98 crosspoint modules 227
PT-ATDM16-X15 228 PM-128×128-X9 221
PT-ATDM32-X15 228 PM-40×32-3G5 214
PT-ATDM32-X28 228 PM-64×64-3G9 217
PT-ATDM64-X28 228 PM-64×64-X9 217
PT-DAC-OB 191 PM-72×64-3G5 218
PT-DACT-OB 199 PM-ADC-IB 113
PT-DEC-IB 108 PM-ADCT-IB 124
PT-ENC-DOB 186 PM-AEB-IB 89
PT-ENC-OB 186 PM-AEB-OB 166
PT-HS1310S-IB 135 PM-AEBT-IB 96
PT-HS-IB 71 PM-AEBT-OB 174
PT-HS-IB+ 76 PM-AEC-IB 89
PT-HSR1310S-OB 207 PM-AEC-OB 166
PT-HSR-DOB 146 PM-AECT-IB 96
PT-HSR-OB 146 PM-AECT-OB 174
PT-HSR-OB+ 152 PM-DAC-OB 190
PT-HSR-OM 234, 237 PM-DACT-OB 197
PT-S-IB 80 PM-ENC-DOB 183
PT-S-IB+ 85 PM-ENC-OB 183
PT-SR-DOB 157, 162 PM-HS-IB 70
PT-SR-OB 157, 162 PM-HS-IB+ 74
PT-SR-OB+ 162 PM-HSR-DOB 144
PT-SYNC 61 PM-HSR-OB 144
TDM signal flow 228 PM-HSR-OB+ 150
BUFFER command 284 PM-MI 28
PM-S-IB 79
C PM-S-IB+ 83
Card-edge controls 268–270 PM-SR-DOB 156
CLEAR command 284 PM-SR-OB 156
Commands PM-SR-OB+ 160
BUFFER 284 PT-128×256-3G15 223
CLEAR 284 PT-128×256-3G28 223
DESTINATION 284 PT-128×256-X15 223
INFORMATION 284 PT-128×256-X28 223
LEVEL 284 PT-ADC-IB 113
POLL 284 PT-ADCT-IB 124
QUERY 284 PT-AEB-IB 89
READ 285 PT-AEB-OB 166
SOURCE 285 PT-AEBT-IB 96
TERMINAL 285 PT-AEC-IB 89
VERIFY 285 PT-AEC-OB 166
XPOINT 285 PT-AECT-IB 96
ZERO 285 PT-DAC-OB 190
Common issues 263 PT-DACT-OB 197
Communications back panel. See PM5-CBP; PT-CBP PT-DEC-IB 105
Components PT-ENC-DOB 183
PT-ENC-OB 183
Index
PT-EXPS 52 block diagram 212

PT-HS1310S-IB 133 configuration 217
PT-HS-IB 70 description 16, 216, 216
PT-HS-IB+ 74 installation 217, 246
PT-HSR1310S-OB 205 operation 216
PT-HSR-DOB 144 parameters 217
PT-HSR-OB 144 specifications 217
PT-HSR-OB+ 150 upgrade procedures 241–245
PT-HSR-OM 236 PM-64×64-X9
PT-MI 28 block diagram 212
PT-PD 50 configuration 217
PT-S-IB 79 description 15, 16, 214, 216, 216, 218
PT-S-IB+ 83 installation 217, 246
PT-SR-DOB 156 operation 216
PT-SR-OB 156 parameters 217
PT-SR-OB+ 160 specifications 217
PT-SYNC 59 PM-72×64-3G5
PT-SYNC-MI 63 block diagram 213
RouterMapper 276 configuration 218
Controls description 16, 218–219
card-edge 268–270 installation 218
features 20–24 operation 218
Crosspoint modules parameters 219
basic signal flow diagram 212 specifications 219
general description 210 upgrade procedures 241–245
installation 248 PM-ATDM16-X9
PM-128×128-3G9 block diagram 228
block diagram 212 configuration 227
configuration 221 description 16, 224, 225
description 16, 220 installation 227, 248
installation 221, 248 operation 224–226
operation 220 parameters 227
parameters 221 special features 226
specifications 221 specifications 228
upgrade procedures 241–245 PM-ATDM9-X5
PM-128×128-X9 block diagram 228
operation 220 special features 226
parameters 221 specifications 228
specifications 221 PT-128×256-3G15
configuration 214 description 16, 222
description 15, 214–215 installation 223, 248
installation 214 operation 222
specifications 215 upgrade procedures 241–245
upgrade procedures 241–245 PT-128×256-3G28
Index

parameters 223 special features 226
upgrade procedures 241–245 TDM signal flow diagram 213, 228
PT-128×256-X15
block diagram 212 D
configuration 223 D# command. See DESTINATION command
description 16, 222 Descriptions
installation 223, 248 back panel modules 17
operation 222 crosspoint modules 210
parameters 223 PM-128×128-3G9 16, 220
specifications 223 PM-128×128-X9 16, 220
PT-128×256-X28 PM-40×32-3G5 15, 214–215
block diagram 212 PM-64×64-3G9 16, 216, 216
configuration 223 PM-64×64-X9 15, 16, 214, 216, 216, 218
description 16, 222 PM-72×64-3G5 16, 218–219
installation 223, 248 PM-ATDM16-X9 16, 224, 225
operation 222 PM-ATDM9-X5 16, 224, 225
parameters 223 PT-128×256-3G15 16, 222
specifications 223 PT-128×256-3G28 16, 222
PT-ATDM16-X15 PT-128×256-X15 16, 222
block diagram 228 PT-128×256-X28 16, 222
configuration 227 PT-ATDM16-X15 16, 224, 225
description 16, 224, 225 PT-ATDM32-X15 16, 224, 225
installation 227, 248 PT-ATDM32-X28 16, 224, 225
operation 224–226 PT-ATDM64-X28 16, 224, 225
parameters 227 frame-specific modules 11, 28, 29–32, 33–34, 35–40,
special features 226 41–45, 46–48, 49, 51, 53, 55, 63
specifications 228 input modules 12–13, 66–67
PT-ATDM32-X15 output modules 13–15, 138–139
block diagram 228 output monitoring modules 16, 230–233
configuration 227 product description 2
description 16, 224, 225 DESTINATION command 284
installation 227, 248
operation 224–226 E
parameters 227
Electrical specifications 25
special features 226
Establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control
specifications 228
interface products 283
PT-ATDM32-X28
Establishing a terminal operation session for serial control
block diagram 228
interface products 282
configuration 227
External power supply frame. See PT-EXPS
description 16, 224, 225
installation 227, 248 F
operation 224–226
parameters 227 Fail-safe parameters, frame 273–275
special features 226 Fan modules
specifications 228 PM-FAN-5 11, 53–54
PT-ATDM64-X28 PM-FAN-8 11, 55–56
block diagram 228 PT-FAN-14 11, 55–56
configuration 227 PT-FAN-16 11, 55–56
Index
Features 3, 20–24 sizes 4

Fiber optical modules specifications
PT-HS1310S-IB electrical 25
back panel modules 133 mechanical 25
block diagram 135
configuration 133 I-K
description 13, 132 I command. See INFORMATION command
installation 133, 250–255 Indicators 18
laser safety guidelines 299–303 INFORMATION command 284
operation 132–133 Injury precautions 291
parameters 134 Input modules
specifications 136 applications integration 67
PT-HSR1310S-OB control requirements 67
back panel modules 205 general description 66–67
block diagram 207 installation 246
configuration 205 LEDs 66–67
description 15, 204 PM-ADC-IB
installation 205, 250–255 back panel modules 113
laser safety guidelines 299–303 block diagram 116
operation 204–205 configuration 113
parameters 205 description 12, 110
specifications 208 installation 113
Field upgrades 264 operation 110–112
Frames parameters 114–115
adding frames 276 specifications 118–119
architecture 4–10 PM-ADCT-IB
components 11, 28, 29–32, 33–34, 35–40, 41–45, 46– back panel modules 123
48, 49–50, 51–52, 53–54 block diagram 127
default settings 271 configuration 124
installing 263 description 12, 120
modules installation 123
crosspoint modules 209–228 operation 120–123
input modules 65–136 parameters 124–126
output modules 137–208 specifications 130–131
output monitoring modules 229–238 PM-AEB-IB
PM-ALARM-5 39–40 back panel modules 88
PM-FAN-5 53–54 block diagram 90
PM-FAN-8 55 configuration 89
PT-ALARM 41–45 description 12, 87
PT-CPB 29–32 installation 88–89
PT-EXPS 51–52 operation 87–88
PT-FAN-14 55 parameters 89
PT-FAN-16 55 specifications 92
PT-MI-15 28 PM-AEBT-IB
PT-MI-28 28 back panel module 95
PT-PD 49–50 block diagram 98
PT-PS 46–48 configuration 96
PT-RES 33–34 description 12, 94
PT-SYNC 57–62 installation 96
PT-SYNC-MI 63 operation 94–95
parameters parameters 96–97
application parameters 271–272 specifications 101
fail-safe parameters 273–275 PM-AEC-IB
Index
back panel modules 88 block diagram 85

description 12, 87 installation 82–83
installation 88–89 operation 82
operation 87–88 parameters 83–84
specifications 93 PT-ADC-IB
PM-AECT-IB back panel modules 113
description 12, 94 installation 113
installation 96 operation 110–112
parameters 96–97 specifications 118–119
specifications 102 PT-ADCT-IB
PM-DEC-IB back panel modules 123
description 12, 103, 103–109 description 12, 120
operation 103–105 installation 123
parameters 106–107 operation 120–123
specifications 109 parameters 124–126
PM-HS-IB specifications 130–131
back panel modules 69 PT-AEB-IB
block diagram 71 back panel modules 88
configuration 70 block diagram 90, 98
description 12 configuration 89
installation 69–70 description 13, 87
operation 69 installation 88–89
parameters 70 operation 87–88
specifications 72 parameters 89
PM-HS-IB+ specifications 92
back panel modules 73 PT-AEBT-IB
configuration 74 block diagram 98
description 12 configuration 96
installation 74 description 13, 94
operation 73 installation 96
parameters 75 parameters 96–97
PM-S-IB PT-AEC-IB
back panel modules 78 back panel modules 88
block diagram 80 block diagram 90, 98
configuration 79 configuration 89
description 12, 78 description 13, 87
installation 78–79 installation 88–89
operation 78 operation 87–88
parameters 79 parameters 89
PM-S-IB+ PT-AECT-IB
Index

description 13, 94 configuration 83
installation 96 description 13, 82
parameters 96–97 installation 82–83
specifications 102 operation 82
PT-DEC-IB parameters 83–84
back panel modules 105 specifications 86
block diagram 108 Installation
configuration 105 back panel modules 258
description 13, 103, 103–109 checklist 263
installation 105 crosspoint modules 227, 248
operation 103–105 fans 262
parameters 106–107 fiber optical modules 250–255
specifications 109 frames 263
PT-HS1310S-IB input modules 246
back panel modules 133 output modules 246
block diagram 135 output monitoring modules 256
configuration 133 PM-AEB-OB 166, 246
description 12, 13, 132 PM-AEBT-OB 174, 246
installation 133, 250–255 PM-AEC-OB 166, 246
laser safety guidelines 250–255 PM-AECT-OB 174, 246
operation 132–133 PM-ATDM16-X9 227, 248
parameters 134 PM-ATDM9-X5 227, 248
specifications 136 PM-DAC-OB 189–190, 246
PT-HS-IB PM-DACT-OB 196–197, 246
back panel modules 69 PM-ENC-DOB 183, 246
block diagram 71 PM-ENC-OB 183, 246
configuration 70 PM-FAN-5 54, 262
description 13 PM-FAN-8 56, 262
installation 69–70, 246 PM-HS-IB+ 74
operation 69 PM-HSR-DOB 144, 246
parameters 70 PM-HSR-OB 144, 246
specifications 72 PM-MI 28
PT-HS-IB+ PM-S-IB+ 82–83
back panel modules 73 PM-SR-DOB 155, 246
block diagram 76 PM-SR-OB 155, 246
configuration 74 PM-SR-OB+ 160
description 13 PT-AEB-OB 166, 246
installation 74 PT-AEBT-OB 166, 246
operation 73 PT-AEC-OB 166, 246
parameters 75 PT-AECT-OB 166, 246
specifications 77 PT-ALARM 38, 43, 257
PT-S-IB PT-ATDM16-X15 227, 248
back panel modules 78 PT-ATDM32-X15 227, 248
block diagram 80 PT-ATDM32-X28 227, 248
configuration 79 PT-ATDM64-X28 227, 248
description 13, 78 PT-DAC-OB 189–190, 246
installation 78–79 PT-DACT-OB 196–197, 246
operation 78 PT-ENC-DOB 183, 246
parameters 79 PT-ENC-OB 183, 246
specifications 81 PT-EXPS 51
PT-S-IB+ PT-FAN 56, 262
Index
PT-HS1310S-IB 133, 250–255 PT-128×256-3G28 16, 222–223

PT-HS-IB+ 74 PT-128×256-X15 16, 222–223
PT-HSR1310S-OB 205, 250–255 PT-128×256-X28 16, 222–223
PT-HSR-DOB 144, 246 PT-ATDM16-X15 16, 224–228
PT-HSR-OB 144, 246 PT-ATDM32-X15 16, 224–228
PT-HSR-OM 236, 256 PT-ATDM32-X28 16, 224–228
PTM-ATDM64-X28 227 PT-ATDM64-X28 16, 224–228
PT-MI 28 input modules
PT-PS 47, 260–261 applications integration 67
PT-PS-DC 47, 260–261 control requirements 67
PT-RES 34, 259 general description 66–67
PT-S-IB+ 82–83 LEDs 66–67
PT-SR-DOB 160, 246 PM-ADC-IB 12, 110–119
PT-SR-OB 160, 246 PM-ADCT-IB 12, 120–131
PT-SR-OB+ 160 PM-AEB-IB 12, 87–93
PT-SYNC 59, 256 PM-AEBT-IB 12, 94–102
PT-SYNC-MI 63 PM-AEC-IB 12, 87–93
Issues 263 PM-AECT-IB 12, 94–102
PM-DEC-IB 12, 103–109
L PM-HS-IB 12, 69–72
L# command. See LEVEL command PM-HS-IB+ 12, 73–77
Lasers. See also Fiber optical modules PM-S-IB 12, 78–81
classifications 300 PM-S-IB+ 12, 82–86
eye damage 300 PT-ADC-IB 12, 110–119
general information 299 PT-ADCT-IB 12, 120–131
labels 303 PT-AEB-IB 13, 87–93
precautions 250–255, 301–302 PT-AEBT-IB 13, 94–102
safety guidelines 299–303 PT-AEC-IB 13, 87–93
LED indicators 18 PT-AECT-IB 13, 94–102
LEVEL command 284 PT-DEC-IB 13, 103–109
PT-HS1310S-IB 12, 13, 132
M-N PT-HS-IB 13, 69–72
PT-HS-IB+ 13, 73–77
Main features 3
PT-S-IB 13, 78–81
Matrix
PT-S-IB+ 13, 82–86
functional arrangement 11–17
installation
sizes 4
alarm modules 257
Mechanical specifications 25
back panel modules 258
Module interconnect, sync module. See PT-SYNC-MI
fan modules 262
Module interconnect. See PM-MI, PT-MI
fiber optical modules 250–255
Modules
input modules 246
components 12–17
output modules 246
crosspoint modules
output monitoring modules 256
general description 210
PM-FAN-5 262
PM-128×128-3G9 16, 220
PM-FAN-8 262
PM-128×128-X9 16, 220–221
power supply 260–261
PM-40×32-3G5 15, 214–215
PT-ALARM 257
PM-64×64-3G9 16, 216
PT-FAN 262
PM-64×64-X9 15, 214, 216, 218
PT-PS 260–261
PM-72×64-3G5 16, 218–219
PT-RES 259
PM-ATDM16-X9 16, 224–228
PT-SYNC 256
PM-ATDM9-X5 16, 224–228
resource module 259
PT-128×256-3G15 16
sync module 256
Index
output modules PM-64×64-X9 216

general description 138–139 PM-72×64-3G5 218
LEDs 139 PM-ADC-IB 110–112
PM-AEB-OB 13, 164–171 PM-ADCT-IB 120–123
PM-AEBT-OB 13, 172–180 PM-AEB-IB 87–88
PM-AEC-OB 13, 164–171 PM-AEB-OB 164–165
PM-AECT-OB 13, 172–180 PM-AEBT-IB 94–95
PM-DAC-OB 13, 188–194 PM-AEBT-OB 172–173
PM-DACT-OB 13, 195–203 PM-AEC-IB 87–88
PM-ENC-DOB 14, 181–187 PM-AEC-OB 164–165
PM-ENC-OB 14, 181–187 PM-AECT-IB 94–95
PM-HSR-DOB 14, 142–147 PM-AECT-OB 172–173
PM-HSR-OB 14, 142–147 PM-DAC-OB 188
PM-HSR-OB+ 14, 148–153 PM-DACT-OB 195–196
PM-SR-DOB 14, 154–158 PM-DEC-IB 103–105
PM-SR-OB 14, 154, 154–158 PM-ENC-DOB 181–183
PM-SR-OB+ 159, 159–163 PM-ENC-OB 181–183
PT-AEB-OB 14, 164–171 PM-FAN-5 53
PT-AEBT-OB 14, 172–180 PM-FAN-8 55
PT-AEC-OB 14, 164–171 PM-HS-IB 69
PT-AECT-OB 14, 172–180 PM-HS-IB+ 73
PT-DAC-OB 14, 188–194 PM-HSR-DOB 142–143
PT-DACT-OB 14, 195–203 PM-HSR-OB 142–143
PT-ENC-DOB 14, 181–187 PM-HSR-OB+ 148–149
PT-ENC-OB 15, 181–187 PM-MI 28
PT-HSR1310S-OB 14, 15, 204–208 PM-S-IB 78
PT-HSR-DOB 15, 142–147 PM-S-IB+ 82
PT-HSR-OB 15, 142–147 PM-SR-DOB 154–155
PT-HSR-OB+ 15, 148–153 PM-SR-OB 154–155
PT-SR-DOB 15, 154–158 PT-128×256-X15 222
PT-SR-OB 15, 154, 154–158 PT-128×256-X28 222
PT-SR-OB+ 159, 159–163 PT-ADC-IB 110–112
output monitoring modules PT-ADCT-IB 120–123
general description 230–233 PT-AEB-IB 87–88
PT-HSR-OM 16, 235 PT-AEB-OB 164–165
sync modules. See also PM-40×32-3G5 PT-AEBT-OB 172–173
PT-SYNC 57–62 PT-AEC-IB 87–88
PT-SYNC-MI 63 PT-AEC-OB 164–165
PT-AECT-OB 172–173
O PT-DAC-OB 188
Operation PT-DACT-OB 195–196
crosspoint modules PT-DEC-IB 103–105
PM-ATDM16-X9 224–226 PT-ENC-DOB 181–183
PM-ATDM9-X5 224–226 PT-ENC-OB 181–183
PT-ATDM16-X15 224–226 PT-EXPS 51
PT-ATDM32-X15 224–226 PT-FAN 55
PT-ATDM32-X28 224–226 PT-HS1310S-IB 132–133
PT-ATDM64-X28 224–226 PT-HS-IB 69
operation notes 269 PT-HS-IB+ 73
PM-128×128-3G9 220 PT-HSR1310S-OB 204–205
PM-128×128-X9 220 PT-HSR-DOB 142–143
PM-40×32-3G5 214 PT-HSR-OB 142–143
PM-64×64-3G9 216 PT-HSR-OB+ 148–149
Index
PT-HSR-OM 235–236 block diagram 191

PT-MI 28 configuration 190
PT-PD 49–50 description 13, 188
PT-PS 46 installation 189–190, 246
PT-PS-DC 46 operation 188
PT-S-IB 78 parameters 190
PT-S-IB+ 82 PM-DACT-OB
PT-SR-DOB 154–155, 159–160 back panel modules 196
PT-SR-OB 154–155, 159–160 block diagram 199
PT-SYNC 57–59 configuration 197
PT-SYNC-MI 63 description 13, 195
Operation notes 269 installation 196–197, 246
Optical specifications, laser modules 303 operation 195–196
Output modules parameters 197–198
general description 138–139 PM-ENC-DOB
installation 246 back panel modules 183
LEDs 139 block diagram 186
PM-AEB-OB configuration 183
back panel modules 165 description 14, 181
block diagram 168 installation 183, 246
configuration 166 operation 181–183
description 13, 164 parameters 184–185
installation 166, 246 specifications 187
operation 164–165 PM-ENC-OB
parameters 167 back panel modules 183
specifications 170, 180 block diagram 186
PM-AEBT-OB configuration 183
operation 172–173 PM-HSR-DOB
parameters 174–176 back panel modules 144
PM-AEC-OB block diagram 146
back panel modules 165 configuration 144
block diagram 168 description 14, 142
configuration 166 installation 144, 246
description 13, 164 operation 142–143
installation 166, 246 parameters 144–145
operation 164–165 reclocker operating modes 143
specifications 170, 180 PM-HSR-OB
PM-AECT-OB back panel modules 144
parameters 174–176 reclocker operating modes 143
PM-DAC-OB specifications 147
back panel modules 189 PM-HSR-OB+
Index

block diagram 152 block diagram 168
description 14, 148 description 14, 164
installation 149–150 installation 166, 246
operation 148–149 operation 164–165
parameters 150–151 parameters 167
reclocker operating modes 149 specifications 170
specifications 153 PT-AECT-OB
PM-SR-DOB back panel modules 173
description 14 parameters 174–176
operation 154–155 PT-DAC-OB
specifications 158 block diagram 191
PM-SR-OB configuration 190
block diagram 157 installation 189–190, 246
configuration 156 operation 188
description 14, 154 parameters 190
installation 155, 246 PT-DACT-OB
operation 154–155 back panel modules 196
parameters 156 block diagram 199
specifications 158 configuration 197
PM-SR-OB+ description 14, 195
back panel modules 160 installation 196–197, 246
block diagram 162 operation 195–196
configuration 160 parameters 197–198
description 159 PT-ENC-DOB
operation 159–160 block diagram 186
parameters 160–161 configuration 183
specifications 163 description 181
PT-AEB-OB installation 183, 246
back panel modules 165 operation 181–183
block diagram 168 parameters 184–185
configuration 166 specifications 187
description 14, 164 PT-ENC-OB
parameters 167 configuration 183
specifications 170 description 14, 15, 181
PT-AEBT-OB installation 183, 246
operation 172–173 PT-HSR1310S-OB
parameters 174–176 back panel modules 205
PT-AEC-OB configuration 205
Index
description 14, 15 specifications 158, 163

installation 205, 250–255 PT-SR-OB+
laser safety guidelines 250–255 back panel modules 160
specifications 208 description 159
PT-HSR-DOB installation 160
description 15, 142 signal flow diagram 141
installation 144, 246 Output monitoring modules
operation 142–143 architecture
parameters 144–145 5RU 230
reclocker operating modes 143 9RU 231
specifications 147 15RU 232
PT-HSR-OB 28RU 233
back panel modules 144 general description 230–233
configuration 144 PT-AEBOM 165
description 15, 142 PT-AECOM 165
installation 144, 246 PT-HSR-OM 144, 149, 173
operation 142–143 block diagram 234, 237
reclocker operating modes 143 description 16, 235
specifications 147 installation 236, 256
PT-HSR-OB+ operation 235–236
back panel modules 149 parameters 236–237
block diagram 152 specifications 238
configuration 150 signal flow diagram 234
description 15, 148 types
installation 149–150 real 235
operation 148–149 virtual 236
parameters 150–151
reclocker operating modes 149 P
specifications 153 P# command. See POLL command
PT-SR-DOB Parameters
back panel modules 155 frame-controllable
block diagram 157, 162 application parameters 271–272
configuration 156 default settings 271
description 15 fail-safe parameters 273–275
installation 155, 160, 160, 246 PM-128×128-3G9 221
operation 154–155, 159–160 PM-128×128-X9 221
parameters 156, 160–161 PM-40×32-3G5 215
specifications 158, 163 PM-64×64-3G9 217
PT-SR-OB PM-64×64-X9 217
back panel modules 155 PM-72×64-3G5 219
block diagram 157, 162 PM-ADC-IB 114–115
configuration 156 PM-ADCT-IB 124–126
description 15, 154 PM-AEB-IB 89
installation 155, 160, 160, 246 PM-AEB-OB 167
operation 154–155, 159–160 PM-AEBT-IB 96–97
parameters 156, 160–161 PM-AEBT-OB 174–176
Index
PM-AEC-IB 89 PT-SR-DOB 156, 160–161

PM-AEC-OB 167 PT-SR-OB 156, 160–161
PM-AECT-IB 96–97 PT-SR-OB+ 160–161
PM-AECT-OB 174–176 PT-SYNC 60
PM-ALARM-5 39–40 RouterMapper-controllable application parameters
PM-ATDM16-X9 227 277–280
PM-DAC-OB 190 Physical architecture
PM-DACT-OB 197–198 128×128 5
PM-DEC-IB 106–107 256×256 6
PM-ENC-DOB 184–185 512×512 7
PM-ENC-OB 184–185 64×64 5
PM-HS-IB 70 Pinouts
PM-HS-IB+ 75 PM-ADC-IB 117
PM-HSR-DOB 144–145 PM-ADCT-IB 128
PM-HSR-OB 144–145 PM-AEB-IB 91, 99
PM-HSR-OB+ 150–151 PM-AEB-OB 169
PM-S-IB 79 PM-AEBT-OB 178
PM-S-IB+ 83–84 PM-DAC-OB 192, 200
PM-SR-DOB 156 PT-ADC-IB 117
PM-SR-OB 156 PT-ADCT-IB 128
PM-SR-OB+ 160–161 PT-AEB-IB 91, 99
PT-128×256-X15 223 PT-AEB-OB 169
PT-128×256-X28 223 PT-AEBT-OB 178
PT-ADC-IB 114–115 PT-ALARM 38, 43
PT-ADCT-IB 124–126 PT-DAC-OB 192, 200
PT-AEB-IB 89 PM-128×128-3G9
PT-AEB-OB 167 block diagram 212
PT-AEBT-IB 96–97 configuration 221
PT-AEC-IB 89 description 16, 220
PT-AEC-OB 167 installation 221, 248
PT-AECT-IB 96–97 operation 220
PT-AECT-OB 174–176 parameters 221
PT-AETB-OB 174–176 specifications 221
PT-ALARM 44–45 upgrade procedures 241–245
PT-ATDM16-X15 227 PM-128×128-X9
PT-ATDM32-X15 227 block diagram 212
PT-ATDM32-X28 227 configuration 221
PT-ATDM64-X28 227 description 16, 220
PT-DAC-OB 190 installation 221, 248
PT-DACT-OB 197–198 operation 220
PT-DEC-IB 106–107 parameters 221
PT-ENC-DOB 184–185 specifications 221
PT-ENC-OB 184–185 PM-40×32-3G5
PT-HS1310S-IB 134 block diagram 213
PT-HS-IB 70 configuration 214
PT-HS-IB+ 75 description 15, 214–215
PT-HSR1310S-OB 205 installation 214
PT-HSR-DOB 144–145 operation 214
PT-HSR-OB 144–145 parameters 215
PT-HSR-OB+ 150–151 specifications 215
PT-HSR-OM 236–237 upgrade procedures 241–245
PT-S-IB 79 PM5-CBP
PT-S-IB+ 83–84 description 11, 29–32
Index

PM-64×64-3G9 parameters 89
block diagram 212 pinouts 91, 99
description 16, 216, 216 PM-AEB-OB
operation 216 block diagram 168
specifications 217 description 13, 164
upgrade procedures 241–245 installation 166, 246
PM-64×64-X9 operation 164–165
block diagram 212 parameters 167
configuration 217 pinouts 169
description 15, 16, 214, 216, 216, 218 specifications 170, 180
installation 217, 246 PM-AEBT-IB
operation 216 back panel modules 95
parameters 217 block diagram 98
PM-72×64-3G5 description 12, 94
description 16, 218–219 parameters 96–97
installation 218 specifications 101
operation 218 PM-AEBT-OB
upgrade procedures 241–245 configuration 174
PM-ADC-IB description 13, 172
back panel modules 113 installation 174, 246
description 12, 110 pinouts 178
installation 113 PM-AEC-IB
operation 110–112 back panel modules 88
parameters 114–115 block diagram 90
pinouts 117 configuration 89
specifications 118–119 description 12, 87
PM-ADCT-IB installation 88–89
block diagram 127 parameters 89
description 12, 120 PM-AEC-OB
pinouts 128 description 13, 164
specifications 130–131 installation 166, 246
PM-AEB-IB operation 164–165
back panel modules 88 parameters 167
block diagram 90 specifications 170, 180
configuration 89 PM-AECT-IB
description 12, 87 block diagram 98
installation 88–89 configuration 96
Index
description 12, 94 back panel modules 105

installation 96 block diagram 108
operation 94–95 description 12, 103, 103–109
specifications 102 parameters 106–107
PM-AECT-OB specifications 109
back panel modules 173 PM-ENC-DOB
installation 174, 246 description 14, 181
operation 172–173 installation 183, 246
PM-ALARM-5 parameters 184–185
description 11 specifications 187
parameters 39–40 PM-ENC-OB
PM-ATDM16-X9 back panel modules 183
block diagram 228 block diagram 186
description 16, 224, 225 description 14, 181
installation 227, 248 installation 183, 246
special features 226 specifications 187
specifications 228 PM-FAN-5
PM-ATDM9-X5 description 11
description 16, 224, 225 PM-FAN-8
installation 227, 248 description 11
operation 224–226 installation 56, 262
special features 226 operation 55
specifications 228 PM-HS-IB
PM-DAC-OB back panel modules 69
configuration 190 description 12, 69–70
description 13, 188 installation 69–70
installation 189–190, 246 operation 69
pinouts 192, 200 PM-HS-IB+
specifications 193–194 back panel modules 73
PM-DACT-OB block diagram 76
configuration 197 installation 74
description 13, 195 operation 73
installation 196–197, 246 parameters 75
operation 195–196 specifications 77
parameters 197–198 PM-HSR-DOB
specifications 202–203 back panel modules 144
PM-DEC-IB block diagram 146
Index

description 14, 142 description 14
installation 144, 246 installation 155, 246
parameters 144–145 parameters 156
reclocker operating modes 143 specifications 158
specifications 147 PM-SR-OB
PM-HSR-OB back panel modules 155
operation 142–143 parameters 156
parameters 144–145 specifications 158
reclocker operating modes 143 PM-SR-OB+
specifications 147 back panel modules 160
PM-HSR-OB+ block diagram 162
block diagram 152 description 159
installation 149–150 parameters 160–161
parameters 150–151 POLL command 284
reclocker operating modes 149 Polling 276
specifications 153 Power distribution module. See PT-PD
PM-MI Power supply frame. See PT-EXPS
configuration 28 Power supply module. See PT-PS
description 11, 28 Precautions
installation 28 injury 291
operation 28 laser safety 250–255, 301–302
PM-S-IB product damage 293
back panel modules 78 Preventing electrostatic discharge 290
block diagram 80 Procedures, commonly performed 263
configuration 79 Product damage precautions 293
description 12, 78 Product description 2
installation 78–79 Protective laser connector covers 251
operation 78 Protocol support 284–285
parameters 79 PT-128×256-3G15
PM-S-IB+ configuration 223
installation 82–83 specifications 223
operation 82 upgrade procedures 241–245
parameters 83–84 PT-128×256-3G28
PM-SR-DOB configuration 223
Index
operation 222 PT-AEB-OB

upgrade procedures 241–245 configuration 166
PT-128×256-X15 description 14, 164
installation 223, 248 pinouts 169
operation 222 specifications 170
parameters 223 PT-AEB-OBP 17, 165, 173, 258
specifications 223 PT-AEBOM 165
PT-128×256-X28 PT-AEBT-IB
installation 223, 248 description 13, 94
operation 222 installation 96
PT-A2-BP 17, 111, 112, 121, 123, 189, 196, 258 PT-AEBT-OB
PT-A2-DTB 17, 112, 123, 189, 196 back panel modules 173
PT-ADC-IB description 14, 172
back panel modules 113 installation 166, 246
description 12, 110 pinouts 178
operation 110–112 PT-AEC-BOC 17, 88, 95, 165, 173
parameters 114–115 PT-AEC-IB
pinouts 117 back panel modules 88
specifications 118–119 block diagram 90, 98
PT-ADCT-IB configuration 89
block diagram 127 installation 88–89
operation 120–123 PT-AEC-IBP 17, 88, 95, 258
parameters 124–126 PT-AEC-OB
pinouts 128 back panel modules 165
specifications 130–131 block diagram 168
PT-AEB-IB configuration 166
block diagram 90, 98 installation 166, 246
installation 88–89 specifications 170
operation 87–88 PT-AEC-OBP 17, 165, 173, 258
parameters 89 PT-AECOM 165
pinouts 91, 99 PT-AECT-IB
specifications 92 back panel modules 95
PT-AEB-IBP 17, 88, 95, 258 block diagram 98
Index
configuration 96 parameters 227

description 13, 94 special features 226
parameters 96–97 PT-CBP
PT-AECT-IBP 17 operation 29–31
PT-AECT-OB PT-DAC-OB
description 14, 172 block diagram 191
installation 166, 246 configuration 190
operation 172–173 description 14, 188
parameters 174–176 installation 189–190, 246
specifications 180 operation 188
PT-AECT-OBP 17 parameters 190
PT-ALARM pinouts 192, 200
description 11, 38, 43 specifications 193–194
installation 38, 43, 257 PT-DACT-OB
operation 35–37, 41–42 back panel modules 196
parameters 44–45 block diagram 199
pinouts 38, 43 configuration 197
PT-ATDM16-X15 description 14, 195
block diagram 228 installation 196–197, 246
description 16, 224, 225 parameters 197–198
installation 227, 248 specifications 202–203
operation 224–226 PT-DEC-IB
special features 226 block diagram 108
PT-ATDM32-X15 description 13, 103, 103–109
operation 224–226 PT-ENC-DOB
operation 224–226 PT-ENC-OB
operation 224–226 PT-EXPS
Index
configuration 52 installation 144, 246

description 51 operation 142–143
installation 51 parameters 144–145
operation 51 reclocker operating modes 143
PT-FAN specifications 147
description 11, 53, 55 PT-HSR-OB
operation 55 block diagram 146
PT-FO-BMI 17, 133, 258 configuration 144
PT-FO-BMO 17, 205, 258 description 15, 142
PT-HS1310S-IB installation 144, 246
configuration 133 reclocker operating modes 143
description 12, 13, 132 specifications 147
installation 133, 250–255 PT-HSR-OB+
laser safety guidelines 250–255 back panel modules 149
PT-HS-IB installation 149–150
configuration 70 reclocker operating modes 149
description 13, 69 specifications 153
installation 69–70, 246 PT-HSR-OM 149, 173
operation 69 block diagram 234, 237
PT-HS-IB+ installation 236, 256
description 13, 74 where used 144, 149
installation 74 PT-MI
operation 73 configuration 28
parameters 75 description 11, 28
specifications 77 installation 28
PT-HSR1310S-OB operation 28
back panel modules 205 PT-PD
installation 205, 250–255 PT-PS
laser safety guidelines 250–255 description 11, 46
operation 204–205 installation 47, 260–261
parameters 205 operation 46
specifications 208 specifications 47–48
PT-HSR-DOB PT-PS-DC
back panel modules 144 description 11
block diagram 146 installation 47, 260–261
description 15, 142 specifications 47–48
Index
PT-RES installation 59, 256

installation 34, 259 parameters 60
PT-S-IB PT-SYNC-MI
description 13, 78 operation 63
installation 78–79 PT-V-BP 17, 69, 73, 78, 82, 105, 144, 149, 155, 160, 183,
operation 78 258
parameters 79
specifications 81 Q-R
PT-S-IB+ Q command. See QUERY command
back panel modules 82 QUERY command 284
block diagram 85 R command. See READ command
configuration 83 READ command 285
description 13, 82 Real output monitoring 235
installation 82–83 Reclocker operating modes 143, 149
operation 82 Replacing components 264
parameters 83–84 Resource module. See PT-RES
specifications 86 RouterMapper configuration 276
PT-SR-DOB RS-232 pin assignments 30
back panel modules 155 RS-422 pin assignments 31
block diagram 157, 162
configuration 156 S
description 15
S # command. See SOURCE command
installation 155, 160, 160, 246
s PM-AECT-IB
operation 154–155, 159–160
parameters 156, 160–161
Safety precautions
specifications 158, 163
injury precautions 291
PT-SR-OB
lasers 250–255, 301–302
classifications 300
block diagram 157, 162
eye damage 300
configuration 156
general information 299
description 15, 154
labels 303
installation 155, 160, 160, 246
preventing electrostatic discharge 290
operation 154–155, 159–160
product damage precautions 293
parameters 156, 160–161
safety terms and symbols in this manual 288
specifications 158, 163
safety terms and symbols on the product 289
PT-SR-OB+
Serial control
pin assignments
block diagram 162
RS-232 30
configuration 160
RS-422 31
description 159
Settings
installation 160
application parameters 271–272, 277–280
operation 159–160
default settings 271
parameters 160–161
fail-safe parameters 273–275
specifications 163
Signal flow diagram. See Block diagrams
PT-SYNC
SNMP 21, 22
block diagram 61
SOURCE command 285
configuration 59
Special features
description 11, 57–59
Index
PM-ATDM16-X9 226 PT-AECT-OB 180

PM-ATDM9-X5 226 PT-ATDM16-X15 228
PT-ATDM16-X15 226 PT-ATDM32-X15 228
PT-ATDM64-X28 226 PT-DAC-OB 193–194
Specifications PT-DACT-OB 202–203
frames 25 PT-DEC-IB 109
laser modules optical 303 PT-ENC-DOB 187
PM-128×128-3G9 221 PT-ENC-OB 187
PM-128×128-X9 221 PT-HS1310S-IB 136
PM-40×32-3G5 215 PT-HS-IB 72
PM-64×64-3G9 217 PT-HS-IB+ 77
PM-64×64-X9 217 PT-HSR1310S-OB 208
PM-72×64-3G5 219 PT-HSR-DOB 147
PM-ADC-IB 118–119 PT-HSR-OB 147
PM-ADCT-IB 130–131 PT-HSR-OB+ 153
PM-AEB-IB 92 PT-HSR-OM 238
PM-AEB-OB 170, 180 PT-PS 47–48
PM-AEBT-IB 101 PT-PS-DC 47–48
PM-AEC-IB 93 PT-S-IB 81
PM-AEC-OB 170, 180 PT-S-IB+ 86
PM-AECT-IB 102 PT-SR-DOB 158, 163
PM-ATDM16-X9 228 PT-SR-OB 158, 163
PM-ATDM9-X5 228 PT-SR-OB+ 163
PM-DAC-OB 193–194 PT-SYNC 62
PM-DACT-OB 202–203 Sync module. See PT-SYNC
PM-DEC-IB 109
PM-ENC-DOB 187 T
PM-ENC-OB 187 T command. See TERMINAL command
PM-HS-IB 72 Terminal block adapter 113, 123
PM-HS-IB+ 77 TERMINAL command 285
PM-HSR-DOB 147 Terminal operations
PM-HSR-OB 147 establishing a session for serial control interface
PM-HSR-OB+ 153 products 282
PM-S-IB 81 establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control
PM-S-IB+ 86 interface products 283
PM-SR-DOB 158 establishing a terminal operation session 281
PM-SR-OB 158
PM-SR-OB+ 163 U-Z
PT-ADC-IB 118–119
Upgrade procedures for 3 Gb modules 241–245
PT-ADCT-IB 130–131
V # command. See VERIFY command
PT-AEB-IB 92
VERIFY command 285
PT-AEB-OB 170
Virtual output monitoring 236
PT-AEBT-IB 101
X # command. See XPOINT command
PT-AEBT-OB 180
XPOINT command 285
PT-AEC-IB 93
Z command. See ZERO command
PT-AEC-OB 170
ZERO command 285
PT-AECT-IB 102
Index

Harris Platinum

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Harris Platinum

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers

Frames and Modules

Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Installation, Configuration, and

Chapter 2: Frame Modules

iv Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Chapter 3: Input Modules

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual v

Specifications ...................................................................................... 101

Chapter 4: Output Modules

vi Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Specifications ...................................................................................... 153

Specifications ...................................................................................... 193

Chapter 5: Crosspoint Modules

Operation ............................................................................................. 222

Chapter 6: Output Monitoring Modules

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual ix

Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components ......................... 264

Chapter 9: Terminal Operation

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and

Appendix B: Laser Safety Guidelines

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xi

Table P-1. Revision History of Manual (Continued)

Table P-2. Writing Conventions

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xv

PT-PS Power Supply

EMC Compliance Standards

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

Figure P-1. RoHS Compliance Emblem

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment

Figure P-2. WEEE Compliance Emblem

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 1

2 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 3

Table 1-1. Platinum Series Architectural Information

Matrix module capacity

4 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Figure 1-1. 72×64 Physical Architecture

Output modules Input modules

Figure 1-2. 128×128 Physical Architecture

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 5

Output modules Input modules

Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)

Figure 1-3. 256×256 Physical Architecture

6 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Outputs 129-256 4 3 Inputs 129-256

Resource (2), TDM XPT (2),

Outputs 257-384 6 5 Inputs 257-384

Output modules Input modules

Outputs 385-512 8 7 Inputs 385-512

Figure 1-4. 512×512 Physical Architecture

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 7

Figure 1-5. Platinum 5RU Frame Modular Components

Figure 1-6. Platinum Frame Modular Components (15RU Shown)

Figure 1-7. Platinum 15RU Frame Showing Back Panel

10 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 11

Table 1-3. Input Modules: 5RU and 9RU Frames

Table 1-4. Input Modules:15RU and 28RU Frames

12 Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Table 1-4. Input Modules:15RU and 28RU Frames (Continued)

Table 1-5. Output Modules: 5RU and 9RU Frames